HomeMy WebLinkAboutContract 32513CITY SECRETARYa��1
CONTRACT NO. � ,
THE CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS
HVAC SYSTEMS MODIFICATIONS
FOR
WILL ROGERS MEMORIAL CENTER
TPW2005-04
Fo WORT H
MIKE MONCRIEF
MAYOR
THIS COPY Fot
CONTACTOR
6KRACMn SONIN10 CC
V ' CITY SECRMff
CITY MAUGErS 0RX-1
ENGINEERING W.
UPW - FILE COPY
CHARLES BOSWELL
CITY MANAGER
Robert Goode, P.E.
Director, Transportation and Public Works
Kirk Slaughter
Public Events Director
Summit Consultants
1300 Summit Avenue, Suite 420
Fort Worth, TX 76102
August 2005
e...»..».....................
w. k. I
GARRETT S. BROWN r
9 90873
N AL
-- I-7 - oS
..
,.
an
..
1-1
City of Fort Worth, Texas
Mayor and Council Communication
COUNCIL ACTION: Approved on 10/11/2005
DATE: Tuesday, October 11, 2005
LOG NAME: 20FREERWRMC
REFERENCE NO.: **C-21076
no SUBJECT:
Authorize Execution of a Contract with Freer Mechanical Contractors, Inc., for Modifications to the
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Systems at the Will Rogers Memorial Center
on
RECOMMENDATION:
It is recommended that the City Council authorize the City Manager to execute a contract with Freer
in Mechanical Contractors, Inc., in the amount of $671,417.00 for modifications to the Heating, Ventilation and
Air Conditioning (HVAC) systems at the Will Rogers Memorial Center for the Public Events Department.
DISCUSSION:
On June 7, 2005, (M&C G-14824) the City Council rejected the HVAC systems modifications for the Will
in Rogers Memorial Center, and authorized the issuance of a second Request for Proposals or competitive
bids.
The Notice to Bidders was advertised on August 4 and 11, 2005 in the Commercial Recorder and the bid
documents were posted on the Buzzsaw site. The Competitive Sealed Proposals, Best Value bids were
received on September 1, 2005. The five firms that provided bids for the base project and three add
altemates are as follows:
Freer Mechanical Contractors $671,417.00
SkiHi Enterprises $693,200.00
Infinity Contractors $699,200.00
Sigma Mechanical $761,000.00
DMI/Decker Mechanical $808,152.00
The Project consists of piping and damper modifications in the central plant, replacement of air handlers
and pumping system in the Justin Arena, routing of fiber optic cable to connect adjacent buildings,
migration of all other control points to new operator's station and sensor replacements at Exhibit Building
and Auditorium.
The estimated overall project cost is:
Design $40,175.00
Construction $671,417.00
Contingency, staff management $45.000.00 I ,
Total $756,592.00
Freer Mechanical Contractors, Inc., is in compliance with the City's M/WBE Ordinance by committing to
20% M/WBE participation. The City's MI BE goal on this project is 10%.
This project is located in COUNCIL DISTRICT 7, but serves all Fort Worth residents.
FISCAL INFORMATION/CERTIFICATION:
The Finance Director certifies that funds are available in the current capital budget, as appropriated, of the
Public Events Fund.
TO Fund/Account/Centers FROM Fund/Account/Centers
C192 541200 025192004002 $671,417.00
Submitted for City Manager's Office by: Marc Ott (8476)
Originating Department Head: Robert Goode (7804)
Additional Information Contact: Dalton Murayama (8088)
..
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
Best Value Proposals for HVAC SYSTEMS MODIFICATIONS, Will Rogers Memorial Center, 3401 West
Lancaster Avenue, Fort Worth, will be received at the Purchasing Office, City of Fort Worth, 1000
Throckmorton, Fort Worth, 76107, until 1:30 P.M., Thursday, September 1, 2005 and will be opened and
publicly read aloud approximately thirty minutes later in the Council Chambers.
After evaluating the Proposals submitted, the City shall select the Proposer that offers the best value to
the City and enter into negotiations with that Proposer. The City may discuss with the selected Proposer
options for a scope or time modification and any price change associated with such modification.
A Pre -Bid Conference will be held at 10:OOAM, Tuesday, August 16, 2005 at the South Texas Room,
Amon Carter Exhibits Building, Will Rogers Memorial Center
The Project consists of piping and damper modifications in the central plant, replacement of air handlers
and pumping system in the Justin Arena, routing of fiber optic cable to connect adjacent buildings,
migration of all other control points to new operator's station, and sensor replacements at Exhibit Building
and Auditorium. The contractor will be required to phase the work and coordinate all equipment
downtime with the operating schedule of the Facility to minimize disruption to the Facility operations.
All proposers will be required to submit information concerning the M/WBE(s) that will participate in the
contract to meet or exceed the 10% goal. The information shall include: (1) the name, address, and
telephone number of each M/WBE; (2) the description of the work to be performed by each M/WBE; and
(3) the approximate amount/percentage of the participation.
The M/WBE firm(s) must be located or doing business in the City's geographic market area that includes
the following nine (9) counties: Tarrant, Parker, Johnson, Collin, Dallas, Denton, Ellis, Kaufman, and
Rockwall. The M/WBE firm(s) must be currently certified or in the process of being certified by the North
Central Texas Regional Certification Agency (NCTRCA), or Texas Department of Transportation (TxDot),
Highway Division prior to recommendation for award being made to the City Council. Refer to
Instructions to Bidders, Paragraph 2, Minority/Womens Business Enterprise (M/WBE). Contact the
M/WBE Office (817 392-6104) to obtain lists of certified subcontractors and suppliers. Bidders must
submit a bid bond with their proposal. Contractors will be required to post Payment and Performance
Bonds and provide Contractors General Liability and Statutory Workers Compensation Coverage.
Copies of the Project Manual and plans for this project may be obtained on line at no cost at
httD://DroiectDoint.buzzsaw.com/client/fortworthgov with user name "Cowtown" with password
"Cowtown2004", and click on folder "TPW Projects. For additional information contact Dalton Murayama,
AIA, at 817-392-8088 or Garrett Brown at Summit Consultants, Inc, 817-878-4242.
Advertisement: August 4, 2005
August 11, 2005
TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
PROPOSAL
BID CLARIFICATION
GENERAL CONDITIONS
WEATHER TABLE
WAGE RATES
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTRACT
PERFORMANCE BOND
PAYMENT BOND
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE WITH WORKERS' COMPENSATION LAW
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. PROPOSAL REQUIREMENTS: The following requirements shall be used in the preparation of
the response to this Request for Sealed Proposals:
• Use the Proposal Form provided in the Project Manual.
• Entries on the Proposal Form may be handwritten or typed
Write in contract duration
• Write in your proposed MWBE Goal
• Acknowledge all addenda on the Proposal Form
• Have a Principal sign the Proposal. If the Offeror is a corporation, the president or a vice-
president must sign the Proposal. If the Offeror is a partnership, then the person/entity who is the
managing/general partner must sign the proposal.
• include cashier's check or an acceptable bidder's bond written by a corporate surety payable to
the City of Fort Worth, in an amount of not less than five (5%) per cent of the total of the bid
submitted.
In order for a surety to be acceptable to the City, the surety must (1) hold a certificate of authority
from the Untied States secretary of the treasury to qualify as a surety on obligations permitted or
required under federal law; or (2) have obtained reinsurance for any liability in excess of
$100,000 from a reinsurer that is authorized and admitted as a reinsurer in the state of Texas and
is the holder of a certificate of authority from the Untied States secretary of the treasury to qualify
as a surety on obligations permitted or required under federal law. Satisfactory proof of any such
reinsurance shall be provided to the City upon request. The City, in its sole discretion, will
determine the adequacy of the proof required herein.
1A. SELECTION OF CONTRACTOR:
The City shall select the Proposer that offers the best value based upon the following criteria and
on its ranking evaluation.
In determining the Best Value Offeror, the City will consider:
1. The proposed price (60%)
2. The proposed project schedule (10%)
The reputation/experience of the Offeror as demonstrated by past project work
and the report of references (10%)
3. The Offerer's past relationship with the City. (10%)
4. MWBE participation (10%)
."NOTE": If the Offeror has no previous work experience with the city, then the reputation
evaluation criterion will represent 20% of the overall score
After ranking the responses to the RFP, the City shall first attempt to negotiate a contract with the
selected Proposer. The City and its architect may discuss with the selected Offeror options for a
scope or time modification, MWBE participation, and any price change associated with the
modifications.
If the City is unable to negotiate a contract with the selected Proposer, the City shall, formally and
in writing, end negotiations with that Proposer and proceed to the next Proposer in the order of
the selection ranking until a contract is reached or all proposals are rejected.
2. MINORITY/WOMENS BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (MWWBE)
If your bid is in excess of $25,000, the MWBE Program applies, and you have five City business days
following the bid date to prepare and submit your MWWBE Plan to the Manager, Architectural Services
Division, 310 West Tenth Street. Early submittal is encouraged.
All purchases from MWWBE suppliers, second tier subcontractors and second tier suppliers may be
included in M/ BE contribution toward meeting the goal.
The Bidder shall submit the MWWBE UTILIZATION FORM, PRIME CONTRACTOR WAIVER FORM
and/or the GOOD FAITH EFFORT FORM ("Documentation") as appropriate. The Documentation must
be received no later than 5:00 P.M. five (5) City business days after the bid opening date. The Bidder
shall obtain a receipt from the appropriate employee of the managing department to whom delivery was
made. Such receipt shall be evidence that the City received the documentation.
Successful Bidder will be required to submit co -signed letters of intent or executed agreements with all
MWWBE subcontractors and suppliers prior to receiving a Notice to Proceed.
3. BID SECURITY: Cashier's check or an acceptable bidder's bond payable to the City of Fort
Worth, in an amount of five (5) per cent of the bid submitted. The Bid Security must accompany the bid
and is subject to forfeit in the event the successful bidder fails to execute the contract documents within
ten (10) days after the contract has been awarded. The Bid Security shall be included in the envelope
containing the bid proposal. Failure to submit the Bid Security will result in the proposal not being consid-
ered for this project. Bidder's bond will be returned if the City fails to award the contract within 60
calendar days of receipt of bids, unless the Bidder agrees to an extension.
4. PAYMENT BOND AND PERFORMANCE BOND: For projects in excess of $25,000, the
successful bidder entering into a contract for the work will be required to give the City surety in a sum
equal to the amount of the contract awarded. The form of the bond shall be as herein provided and the
surety shall be acceptable to the City. All bonds furnished hereunder shall meet the requirements of
Texas Government Code Section 2253, as amended.
If the total contract price is $25,000 or less, payment to the contractor shall be made in one lump sum.
Payment shall not be made for a period of 45 calendar days from the date the work has been competed
and accepted by the City.
If the contract is in excess of $25,000, a Payment Bond shall be executed, in the amount of the contract,
solely for the protection of all claimants supplying labor and materials in the prosecution of the work.
If the contract amount is in excess of $100,000, a Performance Bond shall also be provided, in the
amount of the contract, conditioned on the faithful performance of the work in accordance with the plans,
specification, and contract documents. Said bond shall be solely for the protection of the City of Fort
Worth.
5. PRE -BID SITE INVESTIGATION: Prior to filing a bid, the bidder shall examine the site(s) of the
work and the details of the requirements set out in these specifications to satisfy himself as to the
conditions which will be encountered relating to the character, quality, and quantity of the work to be
performed and materials and equipment required. The filing of a bid by the bidder shall be considered
evidence that he has complied with these requirements.
6. AMBIGUITY: In case of ambiguity or lack of dearness in stating prices in the proposal, the City
reserves the right to adopt the most advantageous construction thereof to the City or to reject the propos-
al.
7. WAGE RATES: Not less than the prevailing wage rates set forth in Contract Documents, must be
paid on this project.
8. POST BID - PREAWARD SUBMITTALS: Bidders are required to submit the following information
to the Architectural Services Section, Facilities Management Division, 319 West Tenth Street, Fort Worth,
TX 76102, within five business days subsequent to bid opening (Normally Thursday following a Thursday
bid opening) in order to assist City staff in determining the Contractor's capability of performing the work
and in meeting City contract requirements:
Minority/Women's Business Documentation (for bids in excess of $25,000)
Contractors Qualification Statement (AIA Form A305)
Proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers
Proof of insurability for Statutory Workers Compensation Insurance
9. Not used
10. DISCREPANCIES AND ADDENDA:
Should a bidder find any discrepancies in the drawings and specifications, or should he be in doubt as to
their meaning, he shall notify the City at once. If required, the City will then prepare a written addendum
that will be available to all Bidders at the Plans Desk or place designated for distribution of Bid
Documents by the Notice to Bidders. The Contractor is responsible for determining if addenda are
available and for securing copies prior to submitting a proposal. Oral instructions or decisions unless
confirmed by addenda will not be considered valid, legal or binding. No extras will be authorized because
of failure of the contractor to include work called for in the addenda.
Bidder must acknowledge addenda in the Proposal. Failure to acknowledge addenda may cause the
Proposal to be ruled non -responsive. It is the Contractor's responsibility to obtain Addenda and include
its information in the Proposal.
11. INSURANCE
WORKERS COMPENSATION INSURANCE: Bidders will be required to demonstrate that coverage is in
effect at time of Award of Contract. Sample Certificate of Insurance, or other proof that Workers
Compensation Insurance will be obtained, must be submitted within five working days of bid opening
LIMITS
Contractors General Liability $1,000,000
Automobile $1,000,000
Builders Risk Contract amount
Environmental Risk $1,000,000
Excess Liability Umbrella $1,000,000
12. TAXES: Equipment and materials not consumed by or incorporated into the work are subject to
State sales taxes under House Bill 11, enacted August 15, 1991,
13. PERMITS: Contractor shall apply for all City of Fort Worth Permits and for any other permits
required by this project. City of Fort Worth Building and Trade Permit fees are waived. Separate permits
may be required for each work location.
14. UTILITIES AND IMPACT FEES: The City will pay water and sewer utilities tap fees and impact
fees. The Contractor will include all remaining fees from the electrical and gas companies in the base
bid. The Contractor will be responsible for coordinating with City and utility companies for installation of
utilities. Unless indicated otherwise on the plans, the contractor will be responsible for costs and
installations from the building side of the water meter and sewer tap.
15. CONTRACT DURATION: Time is of the essence. City will evaluate the bids based upon
construction cost and stated bid period of time for construction. Where the Bidder proposes time, the City
will evaluate the City's program needs in determining the acceptability of the proposed contract duration.
The City reserves the right to award the contract upon those terms considered by the City to be in its best
interests.
16. ADJUSTMENT OF QUANTITIES: Where unit prices and estimated quantities are used to
compute the contract amount, the Owner may increase the quantities by an amount that is 20% of the
total cost for that section. Unit prices for adjustments to unit quantities in excess to 20% may be
negotiated at the request of either party.
17. MANUFACTURER'S REFERENCE: Catalog, brand names, and manufacturer's references are
descriptive, not restrictive. Bids on brands of like nature and quality will be considered. Contractor shall
inform the City of any substitutions intended for the project within 5 business days of bid opening. Failure
to inform the City of substitute projects will obligate the contractor to provide the specified material if
awarded the contract. Within 14 days after bid opening and upon request of the architect or contractor,
the contractor will submit a full sized sample and/or detailed information as required allowing the architect
to determine the acceptability of proposed substitutions. Where equipment has been listed as "no
substitute accepted", the City will accept no alternates to the specified equipment.
00000
BID CLARIFICATION
WRMC HVAC Upgrades
1, Base Bid
The controls contract is to be provided as a part of the general contract. The controls contract
should be listed as a separate line item and provided with a narrative that explains scope of work
included.
Base bid is to include replacement of the John Justin Arena chilled water pump. Provide new
horizontal split case pump equal to PACO 4012(740 GPM @ 110 ft hd) Non overloading at 30 HP.
Include new pump accessories to include strainer, shutoff valves, triple duty valve, pressure gages, and
spherical rubber type flexible couplings.
Base bid is to include start stop control of existing condenser water pumps (6 total) and three
cooling tower fans. All of these control points are currently available at the existing motor control center.
2. Add Alternate #2 includes routing of fiber optic cable to connect the following buildings: Central Plant,
Exhibit Hall, John Justin Arena, Moncrief Building. The pricing should consider all pathways are existing
and existing hangars, supports and underground conduit will be available for use. Pricing shall use the
following assumptions: 2000 feet total fiber length. Fiber shall be 6 fiber cable equal to 'Optical Cable
Corporation DXO6-055D-WLS/900-OFCR-IAD" This cable has the following description: 6 fiber 62.5
Mutimode Tight Buffer Indoor/Outdoor PVC Inner and Outer Jacket with aluminum Interlocking armor
between the jackets. Two of the fibers in the pathway will be available for DDC control signal use. The
remaining fibers will be for use by The City of Fort Worth for other data use.
3. Add Alternate #3 includes migration of all other control points to appear a new operators workstation.
All other control points is intended to include all points at the facility not included as new points in the
construction documents. The pricing for this item will assume that Add Alternate #2 (fiber optic) is also
accepted as a part of this contract.
PROPOSAL
�. TO: CHARLES BOSWELL
CITY MANAGER
CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS
_ FOR: HVAC SYSTEMS MODIFICIATIONS
WILL ROGERS MEMORIAL CENTER
Pursuant to the foregoing "Notice to Bidders," the undersigned has thoroughly examined the plans,
specifications and the site, understands the amount of work to be done, and hereby proposes to do all the
work and furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessary to fully complete all the work as provided
in the plans and specifications, and subject to the inspection and approval of the Director of
Transportation and Public Works of the City of Fort Worth.
Upon acceptance of this Proposal by the City Council, the bidder is bound to execute a contract and, if
the contract amount exceeds $25,000.00, furnish Performance and/or Payment Bonds approved by the
City of Fort Worth for performing and completing the Work within the time stated and for the following
sum, to wit:
DESCRIPTION OF ITEMS
Base Bid 495, 864.00
Add Alternate 1 (Chilled Water Loop in Auditorium) 53, 504.00
Add Alternate #2 (Routing of fiber optic cable 33,189.00
Add Alternate #3 (migration of other control points) 88, 860.00
The undersigned agrees to complete the Work within 180 calendar days after the date of Notice
to Proceed.
The undersigned proposes to provide 19 % of the base bid in MWBE participation.
The City reserves the right to accept or reject any and all bids or any combination thereof proposed for
the above work.
The undersigned assures that its employees and applicants for employment and those of any labor
organization, subcontractors or employment agency in either furnishing or referring employee applicants
to the undersigned are not discriminated against as prohibited by the terms of City Ordinance 7278 as
amended by City Ordinance 7400 (Fort Worth City Code Section 13A-21 through 13A-29).
Residency of Bidders: The 1985 Session of the Texas Legislature passed house Bill 620 relative to the
award of contracts to non-resident bidders. The law provides that, in order to be awarded a contract as
low bidder, non-resident bidders (out of state contractors whose corporate offices or principal place of
business are outside of the State of Texas) that bid projects for construction, improvements, supplies or
services in Texas at an amount lower than the lowest Texas resident bidder by the same amount that
Texas resident bidder would be required to underbid a non-resident bidder in order to obtain a
comparable contract in the state in which the non-resident's principal place of business is located. The
FT, "� YEN.
appropriate blanks in Section A must be filled out by all non-resident bidders in order for your bid to meet
specifications. The failure of out of state or non-resident bidders Failure to complete the forms may
disqualify that bidder. Resident bidders must check the box in Section B.
A. 1_1 Non-resident vendors in (give state), our principal place of
business, are required to be _ percent lower than resident bidders by state
law.
1_1 Non-resident vendors in (give state), are not required to
underbid resident bidders.
B. od Our principal place of business or corporate offices are in the State of
Texas.
Within ten (10) days of receipt of notice of acceptance of this bid, the successful bidder will execute the
formal contract and will deliver an approved Surety Bond for the faithful performance of this contact. The
attached deposit check in the sum of Dollars ($_� is to become the property of the
City of Fort Worth, Texas, or the attached Bidder's Bond is to be forfeited in the event the contract and
bond are not executed within the time set forth, as liquidated damages for delay and additional work
caused thereby.
MINORITY/WOMENS BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (MN BE): (For bids in excess of $25,000)
• I am aware that I must submit information the Manager, Architectural Services Division, concerning
the M/WBE participation within FIVE BUSINESS DAYS of submittal of this Proposal in order to be
RESPONSIVE.
Respectfully submitted,
FREER MECHANICAL CONTRACTORS, INC.
Comp me
By:`%�mo
Signa e/�•
Printed Name of Principal
Title
Address: 1908 SAMUELS AVE.
Street
FORT WORTH, TX 76102
City
Zip
,. Phone: (81 7) 3 3 5— 2101
Fax: (817) 335-2100
Receipt is acknowledged of the following addenda:
Addendum No. 10/A
Addendum No. 2N/A
-YORT WORTH
City of Fort Worth
Page 1 of4
so
0
SubcontractorsJSuvoliers Utilization Form
PRIME COMPANY NAME:
FREER MECHANICAL CONTRACTORS, INC.
PROJECT NAME:
HVAC SYSTEMS MODIFICATIONS FOR WILL ROGERS MEMORIAL
CENTER
City s Mf Project Goal: Prime's M/WBE Project utilization:
10 0/0 19%
Check applicable block to describe prime i
MAW/DBE X NON-MMMBE
aID DATE
9/01/2005
PROJECT NUMBER
��TPW2005-04-0-2005DM
Identify all subcontractors/suppliers you will use on this project
M/WBEs listed toward meeting the project goal must be located in the nine (9) county marketplace or currently doing
-business in the marketplace at the time of bid. Marketplace is the geographic area of Tarrant, Parker, Johnson, Collin, Dallas,
Denton, Ellis, Kaufman and Rockwall counties.
dents ujcb ^tit; er 1Ei-et1 Tie t-IH. ie e3 .sl hcaa a s, ue y P ag s, y >lri
.�'r.�l �L�riLaG 0_�tQ�sL�} ,]B�a�rQl i�-SvOg-SYCEe;�r3 ��"Ciel', ri;�7���� �S71kx�pr�SJaCG:t. T4ky511�'�1G:'15z.G'7�rt�iary
ALL M/WBEs MUST BE CERTIFIED BEFORE CONTRACT AWARD.
Certification means those firms, located or doing business at the time of bid opening within the Marketplace, that have been
determined to be bonafide minority or women businesses by the North Central Texas Regional Certification Agency (NCTRCA), or
the Texas Department of Transportation (TX DOT), highway division. Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) is synonymous
with MinorityMomen Business Enterprise (M(WBE).
M
on
Rev. 5130/03
0
ATTACHMENT 1A
FORTVV{l�?H
Page 2 of 4
Primes are required to identify ALL subcontractors/suppliers, regardless of status; i.e., Minority, Women and non-M/WBEs.
Please list M/V DE firms
fast, use additional sheets if necessary.
Certification N `
(check one)
n:,
SUSCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER T
N T
Detail Detail
"" Company Name i
c X :'
Subcontracting Work Supplies Purchased
Dollar Amount
Address e M yy
T
Telephone/Fax r g B
R °
E
C T
r�r A
ED PARKER, INC
P.O. BOX 1289
$15,471.00
" FORT WORTH,z."'TX 76101 2 X
ELECTRICAL
(817) 332-8481 PH
BASE
- (817) 336-5904 FX
ALPHA SPECIALTY
3000 WICHITA CT.
FORT WORTH, TX 76140 2 X
$15,700.00
(817) 293-1110 PH
THERMAL
(817) 293-4681
INSULATION
BASE
A&S STEEL GROUP LTD
1701 BRENNAN AVE.
FORT WORTH, TX 76106
$48,550.00
(817) 626-7720 PH X
SHEET METAL
(817) 626-0267 FX
BASE
JOHNSON CONTROLS
707 N. FRWY STE. 112 X
BUILDING
$120,000.00
FORT WORTH, TX 76102 2
AUTOMATION
" (817) 870-2399 PH
(CONTROLS)
BASE
(817) 870-1902 FX
ALL-TEX PIPE & SUPPLY
5205 ELLIOT REDDER
X
MATERIAL PIPE, VALVES,
$34,678.00
FORT:;:WORTH, TX 76117 2
VENDOR AND FITTINGS
(817) 831-3821 PH
BASE
(817) 831-2173 FX
ADVANCED AIR SYSTEMS
P.O. BOX 26987
TESTiADJUST/
FORT WORTH, TX 76126 2 X
BALANCE HVAC
$6,275.00
(817) 572-6740 PH
SYSTEM'
BASE
(817) 2,49-7563 FX
Rev. 5130103
Ai IAGNMLNI 1A
SORT_ W_ H
Page 3 of 4
Primes are required to identify ALL subcontractors/suppliers, regardless of status; i.e., Minority, Women and non-M(WBEs.
Please list MlWBE firms first, use additional sheets if necessary.
r:
Certification
(check one)
SUBCONTRACTORISUPPLIER
T
N T
Detail Detail
�.
Company Name
i
C X
Subcontracting Work Supplies Purchased
DollarAmount
Address
e M w
T D
Telephone/Fax
r B B
R 0
E E
C T
A
NORTH TEXAS CORING
P.O. BOX 1380
SAWCUTITING
$900.00
GRANBURY, TX 76048
X
CONCRETE
1(817) 279-8931 PH
BASE
(817) 279-8947 FX
iTEXAS AIR SYSTEMS
+�
4301 HAHN BLVD.
BQUIPNJ=
$82,212.00
HALTOM CITY, TX 76117
X
VENDOR AIR HANDLERS
(817) 281-6165 PH
BASE
(817) 577-9787
i
go,
Rev. 5130103
M
r.i fAI,n MCIVf VH
FoRTWORTH Page 4 of 4
W
1L_j
M
am
L_ i
Total Dollar Amount of M/WBE Subcontractors/Suppliers $ 98, 699.00
Total Dollar Amount of Non-M/WBE Subcontractors/Suppliers $ 225, 087.00
TOTAL DOLLAR AMOUNT OF ALL SUBCONTRACTORSISUPPLIERS $ 323, 786.00
By affixing a signature to this form, the Offeror further agrees to provide, directly to the City upon request, complete and
accurate information regarding actual work performed by all subcontractors, including M/W/DBE(s) arrangements
submitted with the bid. The Offeror also agrees to allow an audit and/or examination of any books, records and files held
by their company. The bidder agrees to allow the transmission of interviews with owners, principals, officers, employees
and applicable subcontractors/suppliers/contractors participating on the contract that will substantiate the actual work
performed by the M/W/DBE(s) on this contract, by an authorized officer or employee of the City. Any intentional and/or
knowing misrepresentation of facts will be grounds for terminating the contract or debarment from City work for a period
of not less than three (3) years and for initiating action under Federal, State or Local laws concerning false statements.
Any failure to comply with this ordinance and create a material breach of contract may result in a determination of an
irres onsible Offeror and barred participating in City work for a period of time not less than one (1) year.
CARL W. PENNINGTON
Authorized Signature Printed Signature
MD%TOR/PROJECT MANAGER
Title
F= MECHANICAL CONTRACTORS, INC.
Company Name
�QQS SAMUECS AVE.
Address
FORT WORTH, TX 76102
City/State/Zip
Contact Name/ritle (if different)
PH (817) 335-2101 FX (817) 335-2100
Telephone and/or Fax
cpennington@freeiTnE- n .cal . com
E-mail Address
9/01/2005
Date
, faf-r laf Trxas
Historically Underutilized Business
Certification and Compliance Program
The Texas Building & Procurement Commission (TBPC),
hereby certifies that
A & S STEEL GROUP LTD
has successfully met the established requirements of the
State of Texas Historically Underutilized Business (HUB)
Certification and Compliance Program to be recognized as a HUB.
This certificate, printed 19-FEB-2005, supersedes any registration and certificate previously issued by the
TBPC's HUB Certification and Compliance Program. If there are any changes regarding the information (Le.,
business structure, ownership, day-to-day management, operational control, addresses, phone and fax
numbers or authorized signatures) provided in the submission of the business' application for
negistration/certfication as a HUB, you must immediately (wsthin 30 days of such changes) notify the TBPC's
HUB program in writing_ The Commission reserves the right to conduct a compliance review at any time to
confirm HUB eligibility. HUB certification may be suspended or revoked upon findings of ineligibility.
?,j A.
CertificateMD Number: 1161710144600 Paul A. Gibson -
File/Vendor Number: 41514 HUB Certification & Compliance Supervisor
Approval Date: 14-FEB-2005 Texas Building & Procurement Commission
Expiration Date: 14-FEB-2009 (512) 305-9071
Note: In order for State agencies and institutions of higher education (universities) to be credited for utilizing
this business as a HUB, they must award payment under the CertificateNlD Number identified above.
Agencies and universities are encouraged to validate HUB certification prior to issuing a notice of award by
accessing the Internet (http://www.tbpc.state.tx.us) or by contacting the TBPC's HUB Certification and
Compliance Program at (888) 863-5881 or (512) 463-5872_
City of Fort Worth General construction Conditions
1.0
R.
WEATHER TABLE
Month Average Inches Snowflce
Days of of Pellets
Rain Rainfall
January 7 1.80 1
February 7 2.36 '
March 7 2.54
April 8 4.30 0
May 8 4.47 0
June 6 3.05 0
July 5 1.84 0
August 5 2.26 0
September 7 3.15 0
October 5 2.68 0
November 6 2.03 `
December 6 1.82 '
ANNUALLY 77 32.30 1
(1) Mean number of days rainfall, 0.01" or more
(2) Average normal precipitation, in inches
(3) Mean number of days 1.0 inch or more
' Less than 0.5 inches
This table is based on information reported from Dallas -Fort Worth Regional Airport, Texas. Latitude 32
deg 54 min north, longitude 97 deg 02 min West, elevation (ground) 551 ft.
Average number of days of rain, snow, and ice are based on records covering 27 years. Precipitation is
based on record of 1941-1970 period.
This table is to be used as a basis for calculation of excess rain or weather days for projects with duration
in calendar days. If the site records indicate that the Contractor was unable to carry out operations due to
weather, it is counted as a weather day. If the number of weather days exceeds the number of average
rain days plus the snowlce-pellet days for a given month, the contract period will be adjusted by Change
Order.
M.
C'7
PROJECT DESIGNATION SIGN
FORTWORTH
3'
T Project Title
Contractor:
2 +n Contractors Name
+' FUNDED BY
2-11r (List Bond Fund, etc)
1-1t2' SCHEDULED COMPLETION DATE
+-I r ' YEAR
s /
1-VT
SIGN IS WHITE WITH BLUE BORDER AND LETTERING IN PMS 288. PROJECT TITLE,
CONTRACTOR. BOND AND COMPLETION DATE INFORMATION IS IN HELVETIC&
CITY OF FORT WORTH LOGO IS AVAILABLE IN A VECTOR FORMAT FROM THE CITY OF FORT
WORTH REPROGRAPHICS DEPT. ALL COPY IS IN PMS 288. THE'MOLLY' LOGO IS PMS 167.
I
FOIZTWORTH
TEXAS CERTIFICATE OF EXEMPTION
I claim an from p yntmt of aala cad use tare: for the purchase of tahcable iten:o described
below ar an the attwhod alder or invoice.
Description of bmw ( or an attached order or ®voice) To be Purchased: Ni Ill
I ehim this exemption for the following reason:
Name of oxeaption organiutiow City of FortWorth
Texas Sales and Use Tax Permit 01-75.600052M
I understand that I will be liable for payment of sales tax which may become due for failure to
empty with the provision of the states, city and or metropolitan transit authority sales and use tax
laws and comptroller rules regarding exempt purehases. I.lability for the tax will be determine by
the price paid for the taxable items purchased or the fair market rental value for the period of time
use.
I understand that it is a misdemeanor to give an exemption certificate to the aellar taxable items
which 1 know, at the time of purchase, wilt be used in a manner other than that expensed In this
certificate and upon convle8ah, may be fined up to $500 per etfenae.
Municipalities are granted tax exempt status per the Texas Constitution. ART S. Section I.
Purchasers: City of FortWorth
r
S et ddress: 1 A Throcktnorton
a �arrn 3 4 cmjxnal�tV be provided
Daft: Phone:-
Paz -
This certificate does not require a number to be valid. Saks and use tax °eumplion numbers' or
"tax exempt" numbers do net exist.
This certificate should be furnished to the supplier. Do not send the completed certificate to the
Comptroller of Public Accounts.
FINANCE DEPARTMENT
PURCHAMOG Dr4LWH
TUB CMv OF Foar WORTH • 1000 THROCKmORTon STMT a Foar Ww m, Taxes 76102
(817) 871-8360 • FAx (817) 871-8440
�" � rtpp a rary<i0
-j : <ap><s 1
2000
BUILDING & CONSTRUCTION TRADES
STANDARD
WAGE RATE
FOR TARRANT
COUNTY
CLASSIFICATION HOURLY RATE
CLASSIFICATION HOURLY RATE
AIR CONDITIONING MECHANIC
$15.96
PLASTERER
13.29
AIR CONDITIONING MECHANIC HELPER
8.81
PLASTERER HELPER
8.63
ACOUSTIC CEILING INSTALLER
13.82
PLUMBER
16.26
ACOUSTIC CEILING INSTALLER HELPER
9.79
PLUMBER HELPER
9.39
BRICKLAYERISTONE MASON
13.25
REINFORCING STEEL SETTER
11.88
BRICKLAYERISTONE MASON HELPER
9.86
REINFORCING STEEL HELPER
9.18
6
CARPENTER
13.00
ROOFER
13.17
CARPENTER HELPER
9.34
ROOFER HELPER
7.82
CONCRETE FINISHER
1200
SHEET METAL WORKER
15.87
CONCRETE FINISHER HELPER
9.44
SHEET METAL WORKER HELPER
9.29
CONCRETE FORM BUILDER
11.59
SHEETROCK HANGER
12.70
CONCRETE FORM BUILDER HELPER
8.87
SHEETROCK HANGER HELPER
9.71
DRYWALL TAPER
11.87
SPRINKLER SYSTEM INSTALLER
16.93
DRYWALL TAPER HELPER
8.25
SPRINKLER SYSTEM INSTALLER HELPER
7,81
ELECTRICIAN JOURNEYMAN
16.29
STEEL WORKER STRUCTURAL
14.66
ELECTRICIAN HELPER
10.20
STEEL WORKER STRUCTURAL HELPER
7.91
ELECTRONIC TECHNICIAN
12.86
WELDER
14.87
ELECTRONIC TECHNICIAN HELPER
12.67
WELDER HELPER
9.67
FLOOR LAYER (CARPET)
13.58
FLOOR LAYER (RESILIENT)
14.48
HEAVY EQUIPMENT OPERATORS
FLOOR LAYER HELPER
8.56
GLAZIER
13.66
EQUIPMENT OPERATORS
14.66
GLAZIER HELPER
9.26
CONCRETE PUMP OPERATORS
13.30
INSULATOR
15,89
INSULATOR HELPER
9.46
CRANE, CLAMSHELL, BACKHOE,
LABORER COMMON
7.82
DERRICK, D'LINE SHO
13.03
"+
LABORER SKILLED
9.66
LATHER
15.80
FORKLIFT OPERATOR
10.34
LATHER HELPER
11.75
FOUNDATION DRILL OPERATOR
11.66
METAL BUILDING ASSEMBLER
13,34
FRONT END LOADER OPERATOR
11.60
METAL BUILDING ASSEMBLER HELPER
7,85
TRUCK DRIVER
9.80
PAINTER
11.93
PAINTER HELPER
8.30
PIPEFITTER
14.33
PIPEFITTER HELPER
10,93
pa
AN
V f ��j�p7 }�ry � J•1WI(�� Nh I`}y �X
�itlY C/C7 C7 Pi� �'I`Mi�j
fix.
an
THE STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF TARRANT
CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
.� This agreement made and entered into this the 111' day of October AD, 20 05, by
and between the CITY OF FORT WORTH, a municipal corporation of Tarrant County, Texas, organized and
existing under and by virtue of a special charter adopted by the qualified voters within said City on the 11th
day of December, A.D. 1924, under the authority (vested in said voters by the "Home Rule" provision) of
.� the Constitution of Texas, and in accordance with a resolution duly passed at a regular meeting of the
City Council of said city, hereinafter called OWNER, and Freer Mechanical Contractors, Inc. of the
City of Fort Worth County of Tarrant State of Texas hereinafter called CONTRACTOR.
WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned to be
made and performed by the Owner, and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date
herewith, the said Contractor hereby agrees with the said Owner to commence and complete the
am construction of certain improvements described as follows:
HVAC SYSTEMS MODIFICATIONS
WILL ROGERS MEMORIAL CENTER
That the work herein contemplated shall consist of furnishing as an independent contractor all labor, tools,
appliances and materials necessary for the construction and completion of said project in accordance with
the Plans and Specifications and Contract Documents adopted by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth,
which Plans and Specifications and Contract Documents are hereto attached and made a part of this
.. contract the same as if written herein.
The Contractor hereby agrees and binds himself to commence the construction of said work within ten (10)
days after being notified in writing to do so by the Owner.
City agrees and binds itself to pay, and the said Contractor agrees to receive, for all of the aforesaid work,
and for stated additions thereto or deductions therefrom, the price shown on the Proposal submitted by the
.,. successful bidder hereto attached and made a part hereof. Payment will be made in monthly installments
upon actual work completed by contractor and accepted by the Owner and receipt of invoice from the
Contractor.
The agreed upon total contract amount shall be $671,417.00 and includes the base bid and Alternates 1-3.
Contractor agrees to complete the project, suitable for occupancy and beneficial use, within 180 calendar
days. Contractor agrees to provide 20% MWBE participation.
Insurance Requirements:
The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until it has obtained all insurance
required under the Contract Documents, and the Owner has approved such insurance. The
Contractor shall indicate on its certificate of insurance included in the documents for execution
,A whether or not its insurance covers subcontractors. It is the intention of the Owner that the
insurance coverage required herein shall include the coverage of all subcontractors.
The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until it has obtained all insurance
ON required under the Contract Documents, and the Owner has approved such insurance. The
Contractor shall be responsible for delivering to the Owner the sub -contractors' certificates of
insurance for approval. The Contractor shall indicate on its certificate of insurance included in the
,w documents for execution whether or not its insurance covers subcontractors. It is the intention of
°'.NJ I E K
the Owner that the insurance coverage required herein shall include the coverage of all
subcontractors
a. WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE:
• Statutory limits
Employer's liability
• $100,000 disease each employee
• $500,000 disease policy limit
• $100,000 each accident
b. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE: The Contractor shall procure and
shall maintain during the life of this contract public liability insurance coverage in the form of a
Commercial General Liability insurance policy to cover bodily injury, including death, and property
damage at the following limits: $1,000,000 each occurrence and $2,000,000 aggregate limit.
• The insurance shall be provided on a project specific basis and shall be endorsed
accordingly,
• The insurance shall include, but not be limited to, contingent liability for independent
contractors, XCU coverage, and contractual liability.
c: BUSINESS AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY:
• $1,000,000 each accident
• The policy shall cover any auto used in the course of the project
d: BUILDER'S RISK OR INSTALLATION FLOATER: This insurance shall be applicable
according to the property risks associated with the project and commensurate with the contractual
obligations specified in the contract documents.
e. EXCESS LIABILITY UMBRELLA
• $2,000,000 each occurrence; $2,000,000 aggregate limit.
• This insurance shall provide excess coverage over each line of liability insurance
required herein. The policy shall follow the form(s) of the underlying policies.
f. SCOPE OF INSURANCE AND SPECIAL HAZARD: The insurance required under the
above paragraphs shall provide adequate protection for the Contractor and its subcontractors,
respectively, against damage claims which may arise from operations under this contract, whether
such operations be by the insured or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by it, against any
insurable hazards which may be encountered in the performance of the Contract.
g. PROOF OF CARRIAGE OF INSURANCE: The Contractor shall furnish the owner with
satisfactory proof of coverage by insurance required in these Contract Documents in the amounts
and by insurance carriers satisfactory to the Owner. The form to be used shall be the current
Accord certificate of insurance form or such other form as the Owner may in its sole discretion
deem acceptable. All insurance requirements made upon the Contractor shall apply to the sub-
contractors, should the Contractor's insurance not cover the subcontractor's work operations
performed in the course of this contracted project.
ADDITIONAL INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS:
C - 2
a. The Owner, its officers, employees and servants shall be endorsed as an additional insured
on Contractor's insurance policies excepting employer's liability insurance coverage under
Contractor's workers' compensation insurance policy.
b. Certificates of insurance shall be delivered to the City of Fort Worth, contract administrator in
the respective department as specified in the bid documents, 1000 Throckmorton Street, Fort Worth,
TX 76102, prior to commencement of work on the contracted project.
® C. Any failure on part of the Owner to request required insurance documentation shall not
constitute a waiver of the insurance requirements specified herein.
d. Each insurance policy shall be endorsed to provide the Owner a minimum thirty days notice
of cancellation, non -renewal, and/or material change in policy terms or coverage. A ten days notice
shall be acceptable in the event of non-payment of premium.
e. Insurers must be authorized to do business in the State of Texas and have a current A.M.
Best rating of A:VII or equivalent measure of financial strength and solvency.
f. Deductible limits, or self -funded retention limits, on each policy must not exceed $10,000.
per occurrence unless otherwise approved by the Owner.
g. In lieu of traditional insurance, Owner may consider alternative coverage or risk treatment
measures through insurance pools or risk retention groups. The Owner must approve in writing any
alternative coverage.
h. Workers' compensation insurance policy(s) covering employees employed on the project
shall be endorsed with a waiver of subrogation providing rights of recovery in favor of the Owner.
i. Owner shall not be responsible for the direct payment of insurance premium costs for
contractor's insurance.
j. Contractor's insurance policies shall each be endorsed to provide that such insurance is
primary protection and any self -funded or commercial coverage maintained by Owner shall not be
called upon to contribute to loss recovery.
k. In the course of the project, Contractor shall report, in a timely manner, to Owner's
officially designated contract administrator any known loss occurrence which could give rise to a
liability claim or lawsuit or which could result in a property loss.
�. I. Contractor's liability shall not be limited to the specified amounts of insurance required
herein.
M. Upon the request of Owner, Contractor shall provide complete copies of all insurance
policies required by these contract documents.
If this Contract is in excess of $25,000, the Contractor shall provide a Payment Bond in the full amount of
the contract. If the contract is in excess of $100,000 Contractor shall provide both Payment and
Performance Bonds for the full amount of the contract. Contractor shall apply for all City of Fort Worth
Permits and for any other permits required by this project. City of Fort Worth Permit fees are waived.
Separate permits will be required for each facility.
If the Contractor should fail to complete the work as set forth in the Plans and Specifications and Contract
Documents within the time so stipulated, plus any additional time allowed as provided in the General
~ Conditions, there shall be deducted from any monies due or which may thereafter become due him, the
liquidated damages outlined in the General Conditions, not as a penalty but as liquidated damages, the
Contractor and his Surety shall be liable to the Owner for such deficiency.
Off
�Q:�'!� YC:� i Y' Y � ✓i 1
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the City of Fort Worth has caused this instrument to be signed inSIX (6)
,., counterparts in its name and on its behalf by the City Manager and attested by its Secretary; ) f#h Jhe
corporate seal of the City of Fort Worth attached. The Contractor has executed this instrun�u-fhrou-p-as'.
duly authorized officers in SIX 6 counterparts with its corporate seal attached. -
'� Done in Fort Worth, Texas, this the iit, day of October 20 0 :'�
Contractor
By: APPRO
e
-.. Tf `s By:
Office Assistant Cit Ma er
Contract Authorization
APPROVAL RECOMMENDED: RECORDED:
Da t I
By: �� By.
Transportation and Public Works City Secretary
APPROVED AS TO FORM AND LEGALITY: O5
4Date
*� By:
Assistant A16rney
CJ
0
LZ
..
-00
so C - 4
Bond #PRF08781344
PERFORMANCE BOND
THE STATE OF TEXAS §
§ KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS:
COUNTY OF TARRANT §
That we, (1) Freer Mechanical Contractors. Inc. , as Principal
-. herein, and (2) Colonial American Casualtv and Surety rogjr anv ,
a corporation organized under the laws of the State of (3) Maryland ,
and who is authorized to issue surety bonds in the State of Texas, Surety herein, are
held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Worth, a municipal corporation located in
Tarrant and Denton Counties, Texas, Obligee herein, in the sum of Six Hundred
Seventv One Thousand. Four Hundred Seventeen Dollars and No Cents Dollars
-" ( $671.417.00 ) for the payment of which sum we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors,
administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee
dated the 11t' day of October , 2005, a copy of which is attached hereto and
made a part hereof for all purposes, for the construction of HVAC SYSTEMS
MODIFICATIONS FOR WILL ROGERS MEMORIAL CENTER Project No. C192-
025192004002.
NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such, if the said Principal
shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications, and
contract documents and shall fully indemnify and hold harmless the Obligee from all
costs and damages which Obligee may suffer by reason of Principal's default, and
reimburse and repay Obligee for all outlay and expense that Obligee may incur in
making good such default, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise, to remain in full
force and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to Chapter 2253 of
the Texas Govemment Code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be
determined in accordance with the provisions of such statute, to the same extent as if it
were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the duly authorized representatives of the Principal
and the Surety have executed this instrument.
SIGNED and SEALED this I 1th day of October , 2005. L
.1.
ATTEST:
(Principal) Secretary
(S E A L)
Witness as to Principal
Freer Mechanical Contractors, Inc.
PRINCIPA
By: _
Name:
Q
Title: / rum,
Address: 1908 Samuels Ave.
Ft Worth. TX 76102
Colonial American Casualty and
Surety Company
SURETY
ATTEST: By: r '
Name: Tracy /Ucker
Secretary Attorney in Fact
(S E A L) Address: 2005 White Settlement Road
Ft Worth, TX 76107
Witness as to Surety Telephone Number: 817/336-8520
NOTE: (1) Correct name of Principal (Contractor).
(2) Correct name of Surety.
(3) State of incorporation of Surety
Telephone number of surety must be stated. In addition, an original copy of
Power of Attorney shall be attached to Bond by the Attomey-in-Fact.
The date of bond shall not be prior to date of Contract.
Bond #PRF08781344
PAYMENT BOND
THE STATE OF TEXAS §
§ KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS:
COUNTY OF TARRANT §
That we, (1) Freer Mechanical Contractors, Inc. , as Principal
herein, and (2) Colonial American Casualtv and Suretv Comh;?,nv ,
a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of (3) Marvland ,
as surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Worth, a municipal corporation
located in Tarrant and Denton Counties, Texas, Obligee herein, in the amount of Six
Hundred Seventv One Thousand. Four Hundred Seventeen Dollars and No
Cents Dollars ( $671,417.00 ) for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety
bind themselves and their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,
jointly and severally, firmly by these presents:
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the
Obligee dated the 11 to day of October , 2005, which contract is hereby referred to
and made a part hereof as if fully and to the same extent as if copied at length, for the
following project. HVAC SYSTEMS MODIFICATIONS FOR WILL ROGERS
MEMORIAL CENTER Proiect No. C192-025192004002.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if
the said Principal shall faithfully make payment to each and every claimant (as defined
in Chapter 2253, Texas Govemment Code, as amended) supplying labor or materials in
the prosecution of the work under the contract, then this obligation shall be void;
otherwise, to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to Chapter 2253 of
the Texas Government Code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be
determined in accordance with the provisions of said statute, to the same extent as if it
were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the duly authorized representatives of the Principal
and the Surety have executed this instrument.
SIGNED and SEALED this 11t' day of October , 2005.
ATTEST:
(Principal) Secretary
(S E A L)
Witness as to Principal
ATTEST:
Secretary
(SEAL)
/a� ltl-ejEz
Witness as #Q Surety
Freer Mechanical Contractors, Inc.
PRINCI L
By: ��--
Name.
Title: ivc. Y
Address: 1908 Samuels Ave.
Ft Worth, TX 76102
Colonial American Casualty and
Surety Companv
SURETY
By: / /
Name: Tracy ucker
Attorney in Fact
Address. 2005 White Settlement Road
Ft Worth. TX 76107
Telephone Number: 817/336-8520
NOTE: (1) Correct name of Principal (Contractor).
(2) Correct name of Surety.
(3) State of incorporation of Surety
Telephone number of surety must be stated. In addition, an original copy of
Power of Attorney shall be attached to Bond by the Attomey-in-Fact.
The date of bond shall not be prior to date of Contract.
Power of Attorney
FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND
COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, and the
.. COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, corporations of the StaKpltaryland, by FRANK E.
MARTIN JR., Vice President, and GREGORY E. MURRAY, Assistant Secretar inrpu su a l4N- thority granted by
Article Vl, Section 2, of the By -Laws of said Companies, which are sel fca'arilti�erewetse s`drf and are hereby
certified to be in full force and effect on the date hereof, doesi �it�� cor}s#ix �Ad p' racy TUCKER,
Tobin TUCKER and W. Lawrence BROWN, rm
��xa}andlawful agent and Attorney-in-a���, fi "o}� ,Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver t awl i��+ �tsl}1it"a"ct and deed: any and all bonds and
undertakings, EXCEPT bgads i�7 kji�17 de#g�zl �(t�e�duto`rs, Community Survivors and Community
Guardians. and thr �i��i,ofi cf b ads �bfc cgs' in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon said
Companies, as fullyific�fn ly1 tct�"tnf� d�purposes, as if they had been duly executed and acknowledged by the
regularly elected offg�fiiI�e'C�pany at its office in Baltimore, Md., in their own proper persons. This power of attorney
revokes that issued oi�gi f of Tracy TUCKER, Tobin TUCKER, W. Lawrence BROWN, dated May 30, 2003.
The said Assistant Secretary dos hereby certify that the extract set forth on the reverse side hereof is a true copy of Article VI,
Section 2, of the By -Laws of said Companies, and is now in force.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Vice -President and Assistant Secretary have hereunto subscribed their names and
affixed the Corporate Seals of the said FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, and the COLONIAL
AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, this 11 th day of October, A.D. 2004.
ATTEST: FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND
COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY
�p DEPps` C�j�,
r J i.
-�-� i SEAL
o lrw
By:
Gregory E. Murray Assistant Secretary Frank E. Martin Jr. Vice President
State of Maryland I
ss:
City of Baltimore
On this 1lth day of October, A.D. 2004, before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, duly
commissioned and qualified, came FRANK E. MARTIN JR., Vice President, and GREGORY E. MURRAY, Assistant
M% Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, and the COLONIAL AMERICAN
CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described in and who
executed the preceding instrument, and they each acknowledged the execution of the same, and being by me duly sworn,
MR severally and each for himself deposeth and saith, that they are the said officers of the Companies aforesaid, and that the seals
affixed to the preceding instrument is the Corporate Seals of said Companies, and that the said Corporate Seals and their
signatures as such officers were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said
Corporations.
®R IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal the day and year first above
written.
*� ®RYIHI'�
Dennis R. Hayden Notary Public
My Commission Expires: February 1, 2005
POA-F 168-2829
EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND
"Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice -President, or any of the Senior w■
Vice -Presidents or Vice -Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee,
shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident
Vice -Presidents, Assistant Vice -Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to
authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertaking, recognizances, stipulations,
policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in
the nature of mortgages,... and to affix the seal of the Company thereto."
EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY
"Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice -President, or any of the Senior
Vice -Presidents or Vice -Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee,
shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident
Vice -Presidents, Assistant Vice -Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to+
authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertaking, recognizances, stipulations,
policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in
the nature of mortgages,...and to affix the seal of the Company thereto."
CERTIFICATE
PM
I, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, and the
COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of
Attorney is still in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certify that the Vice -President who RD
executed the said Power of Attorney was one of the additional Vice -Presidents specially authorized by the Board of Directors
to appoint any Attorney -in -Fact as provided in Article VI, Section 2, of the respective By -Laws of the FIDELITY AND
DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY.
This Power of Attorney and Certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution of the
Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on
the 10th day of May, 1990 and of the Board of Directors of the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY
COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 5th day of May, 1994. .�
RESOLVED: "That the facsimile or mechanically reproduced seal of the company and facsimile or mechanically
reproduced signature of any Vice -President, Secretary, or Assistant Secretary of the Company, whether made heretofore or
hereafter, wherever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and .w.
binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed."
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seals of the said Companies,
this 11th day of October , 2005
"I Oft
Assistunl Secretary
d"
TUCKER AGENCY, L
Bonds and Insurance in
2005 White Settlement Road
Fort Worth, Texas 76107
(817) 336-8520 �,,
M
ZURICH
THIS IMPORTANT DISCLOSURE NOTICE IS PART OF YOUR BOND
We are making the following informational disclosures in compliance with The Terrorism Risk Insurance Act of
2002. No action is required on your part.
Disclosure of Terrorism Premium
The premium charge for risk of loss resulting from acts of terrorism (as defined in the Act) under this bond is
$ waived . This amount is reflected in the total premium for this bond.
40 Disclosure of Availabilitv of Coverage for Terrorism Losses
As required by the Terrorism Risk Insurance Act of 2002, we have made available to you coverage for losses
resulting from acts of terrorism (as defined in the Act) with terms, amounts, and limitations that do not differ
materially as those for losses arising from events other than acts of terrorism.
Disclosure of Federal Share of Insurance Comnanv's Terrorism Losses
The Terrorism Risk Insurance Act of 2002 establishes a mechanism by which the United States government will
share in insurance company losses resulting from acts of terrorism (as defined in the Act) after a insurance company
has paid losses in excess of an annual aggregate deductible. For 2002, the insurance company deductible is 1 % of
direct earned premium in the prior year; for 2003, 7% of direct earned premium in the prior year; for 2004, 10% of
direct earned premium in the prior year; and for 2005, 15% of direct earned premium in the prior year. The federal
share of an insurance company's losses above its deductible is 90%. In the event the United States government
participates in losses, the United States government may direct insurance companies to collect a terrorism surcharge
from policyholders. The Act does not currently provide for insurance industry or United States government
participation in terrorism losses that exceed $100 billion in any one calendar year.
Definition of Act of Terrorism
The Terrorism Risk Insurance Act defines "act of terrorism" as any act that is certified by the Secretary of the
Treasury, in concurrence with the Secretary of State and the Attorney General of the United States:
1. to be an act of terrorism;
2. to be a violent act or an act that is dangerous to human life, property or infrastructure;
3. to have resulted in damage within the United States, or outside of the United States in the case of an air
carrier (as defined in section 40102 of title 49, United 17 States Code) or a United States flag vessel (or a
vessel based principally in the United States, on which United States income tax is paid and whose insurance
coverage is subject to regulation in the United States), or the premises of a United States mission; and
® 4. to have been committed by an individual or individuals acting on behalf of any foreign person or foreign
interest as part of an effort to coerce the civilian population of the United States or to influence the policy or
affect the conduct of the United States Government by coercion.
But, no act shall be certified by the Secretary as an act of terrorism if the act is committed as part of the course of a
war declared by Congress (except for workers' compensation) or property and casualty insurance losses resulting
from the act, in the aggregate, do not exceed $5,000,000.
These disclosures are informational only and do not modify your bond or affect your rights under the bond.
Copyright Zurich American Insurance Company 2003
0-0050749.doc
FO Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland
F Home Office: P.O. Box I227, Baltimore, MD 2I203-1227
EVIPORTANT NOTICE
To obtain information or make a complaint:
You may call the Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland, Colonial American Casualty and
Surety Company, and/or Zurich American Insurance Company's toll -free telephone number for
information or to make a complaint at:
1-800-654-5155
You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies,
coverages, rights, or complaints at:
1-800-252-3439
You may write the Texas Department of Insurance:
P.O. Box 149104
Austin, TX 78714-9104
FAX 9 (512) 475-1771
PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning the premium or
about a claim, you should first contact Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland or Colonial
American Casualty and Surety Company. If the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas
Department of Insurance.
ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: This notice is for information only and does
not become a part or condition of the attached document.
s85431�M (08/01)
CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE WITH
WORKERS' COMPENSATION LAW
Pursuant to V.T.C.A. Labor Code §406.96 (2000), as amended, Contractor certifies that
it provides workers' compensation insurance coverage for all of its employees employed
on City of Fort Worth Project HVAC Svstems Modifications for Will Rogers Memorial
Center and City of Fort Worth Project No. C192-026132004002.
CONTRACTOR:
By:
Na[he: M.
Title:
Date: �•
STATE OF TEXAS §
COUNTY OF TARRANT §
Before me, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared
MffyD,-::; m. Nam"
known to me to be the person whose name is subscribed to the foregoing instrument,
and acknowledged to me that he executed the same as the act and deed of
Frr..r mr, ,
for the purposes and consideration therein expressed and in the capacity therein stated.
Given Under My Hand and Seal of Office this,, day of , 2000
M. SHANNON DVORAK
NOTARY PUBLIC
■ Nr STATE, "IF TEXAS
My ",(JrTim Fxc 12-20-2007
m '
Notary Public in and for the State of
Texas
M
City of Fort Worth, Texas
Transportation Public Works Department
Facilities Management Division/Architectural Services Section
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
LUMP SUM CONTRACT
SECTION A
DEFINITIONS, PROCEDURES AND INTERPRETATIONS
A-1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS . By the term Contract Documents is meant all of the written and drawn documents setting
forth or affecting the rights of the parties, including but not necessarily limited to, the Contract, Notice to Bidders, Proposal, General
Conditions, Special Conditions, Specifications, Plans, Bonds and all Addenda, Amendments signed by all parties, Change Orders,
written Interpretations and any written Field Order for a minor change in the Work.
A-2 ENTIRE AGREEMENT . The Contract Documents represent the entire agreement between the Parties, and no prior or
contemporaneous, oral or written agreements, instruments or negotiations shall be construed as altering the terms and effects of the
Contract Documents. After being executed, the Contract Documents can be changed only by a written Amendment signed by the
Contractor and the Owner, or Change Order, or by a written Field Order for a minor change.
A-3 WORK . By the term Work is meant all labor, supervision, materials and equipment necessary to be used or incorporated
in order to produce the construction required by Contract Documents.
A4 EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS . The Contract Documents shall be executed in six originals, with all
required attachments, including required bonds and insurance certificates, by the Contractor and the Owner in such form as may be
prescribed by law and returned to the Owner within ten business days of notification to Contractor. Failure to execute contracts and
provide required enclosures will be grounds for revocation of award and taking of Bid Bond.
A-5 FAMILIARITY WITH PROPOSED WORK . Before filing a Proposal, the bidder shall examine carefully the, plans,
specifications, special provisions, and the form of contract to be entered into for the work contemplated. He shall examine the site
of work and satisfy himself as to the conditions that will be encountered relating to the character, quality and quantity of work to be
performed and materials to be furnished. The filing of a bid by the bidder shall be considered evidence that he has complied with
these requirements and has accepted the site as suitable for the work.
Claims for additional compensation due to variations between conditions actually encountered in construction and as indicated by
the plans will not be allowed.
A-6 ONE UNIFIED CONTRACT . Insofar as possible, the Contract Documents will be bound together and executed as a
single unified Contract. The intention of the Contract Documents being to provide for all labor, supervision, materials, equipment and
other items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. Words that have well -recognized technical or trade
meanings are used herein in accordance with such recognized meanings.
A-7 DIVISION OF WORK . The arrangement of Drawings and/or Specifications into Divisions, Sections, Articles, or other
Subdivisions shall not be binding upon the contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Trades.
A-8 INTERPRETATIONS . The Architect will furnish such Interpretations of the Plans and Specifications as may be necessary
for the proper execution or progress of the work. Such Interpretations shall be furnished at the instance of the Architect or at the
request of the Contractor, or Owner, and will be issued with reasonable promptness and at such times and in accordance with such
schedule as may be agreed upon. Such Interpretations shall be consistent with the purposes and intent of the Plans and
Specifications and may be effected by Field Order. In the event of any dispute between any of the parties to the Contract and the
Architect or each other involving the interpretation of the Contract Documents, the evaluation of work or materials performed or
fumished by the Architect Contractor, or any subcontractor or materialsman, or involving any question of fault or liability of any party,
the decision of the Owner shall be final and binding.
In the event of inconsistency in the contract documents, the following sequence for interpretation shall be used in order of
precedence: Change Orders and/or Field Orders (by date of issuance); Addenda (by date of issuance); Drawings; Notes and
dimensions on Drawings; Technical Specifications; Special Provisions; Supplementary General Conditions; General Conditions;
and, Construction Contract.
A-9 COPIES OF WORKING DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS . The Architect will furnish to Contractor free of charge 15
sets of working Drawings and 15 sets of Specifications. Contractor shall pay the cost of reproduction for all other copies of
Drawings and Specifications furnished to him.
All Drawings, Specifications and copies thereof furnished by the Owner or the Architect are and shall remain the property of the
Owner. They are not to be used on any other project and, with the exception of one Contract set for each Party to the Contract, are
to be returned to the Owner on request at the completion of the work.
Page t
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.i)dffactorv.com � ' ' Ip�pl M's
A-10 MINORITY AND WOMENS BUSINESS ENTERPRISE POLICY . The City of Fort Worth has goals for the participation of
disadvantaged business enterprises in City contracts. Compliance with the policies designed to meet these goals is mandatory in
order to be considered a responsive bidder. The City policy and procedures to be followed in submitting bids is included.
The City of Fort Worth MWBE Program will take precedence over other subcontractor utilization programs on Block Grant and other
Federally funded Projects.
A-11 CORRELATION AND INTENT. In general, the drawings indicate dimension, locations, positions, quantities, and kinds of
construction; the specifications indicate the quality and construction procedures required. Work indicated on the drawings and not
specified of vice -versa, shall be furnished as though set forth in both. Work not detailed, marked or specified shall be the same as
similar parts that are detailed, marked or specified. If the drawings are in conflict or conflict with the specifications the better quality
or greater quantity or work or materials shall be estimated and shall be furnished or included. Dimensions on drawings shall take
precedence over small-scale drawings. Drawings showing locations of equipment, piping, ductwork electrical apparatus, etc., are
diagrammatic and job conditions may not allow installation in the exact location shown. Relocation shall not occur without the
Architects approval.
A-12 AGE In accordance with the policy ("Policy") of the Executive Branch of the federal government, Contractor covenants
that neither it nor any of its officers, members, agents, employees, program participants or subcontractors, while engaged in
performing this contract, shall, in connection with the employment, advancement or discharge of employees or in connection with
the terms, conditions or privileges of their employment. discriminate against persons because of their age except on the basis of a
bona fide occupational qualification, retirement plan or statutory requirement
Contractor further covenants that neither it nor its officers, members, agents, employees, subcontractors, program participants, or
persons acting on their behalf, shall specify, in solicitations or advertisements for employees to work on this contract, a maximum
age limit for such employment unless the specified maximum age limit is based upon a bona fide occupational qualification,
retirement plan or statutory equipment
Contractor warrants it will fully comply with the Policy and will defend, indemnify and hold City harmless against any claims or
allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractor against City arising out of Contractor's and/or its subcontractors' alleged failure
to comply with the above referenced Policy concerning age discrimination in the performance of this agreement.
A-13 DISABILITY : In accordance with the provisions of the Americans With Disabilities Act of 1990 ("ADA"), Contractor
warrants that it and any and all of its subcontractors will not unlawfully discriminate on the basis of disability in the provision of
services to the general public, nor in the availability, terms and/or conditions of employment for applicants for employment with, or
employees of Contractor or any of its subcontractors. Contractor warrants it will fully comply with ADA provisions and any other
applicable federal, state and local laws concerning disability and will defend, indemnify and hold City harmless against any claims or
allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractors against City arising out of Contractor's and/or its subcontractors' alleged
failure to comply with the above -referenced laws concerning disability discrimination in the performance of this agreement.
SECTION B
IDENTITY OF ARCHITECT
B-1 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION . Where the term "Architect" is used in the "General Conditions of the Contract for
Construction", it shall refer to the Director, Transportation and Public Works or his designated Building Construction Manager. The
Director, Transportation will designate a Project Manager and Building Construction Manager (BCM) to administer this contract and
perform the functions of the "Architect" as indicated in the General Conditions. The design architect or engineer may also be
designated to perform the duties of "Architect". The term 'City' and 'Owner' are used interchangeably and refer to the City of Fort
Worth as represented by the Director of Transportation and Public Works or his designated representative.
B-2 TERMINATION AND SUSPENSION OF WORK : The Owner has the right to terminate the Project for any reason. If the
project is terminated, the Contractor shall:
a) Stop work under the Contract on the date and to the extent specified on the notice of termination. .�
b) Place no further orders or subcontracts except as may be necessary for the completion of the work not terminated.
c) Terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of the work terminated by the
notice of termination.
After termination as above, the City will pay the contractor a proportionate part of the contract price based on the work completed;
provided, however, that the amount of payment on termination shall not exceed the total contract price as reduced by the portion
thereof allocatable to the work not completed and further reduced by the amount of payments, if, any otherwise made. Contractor
shall submit its claim for amounts due after termination as provided in this paragraph within 30 days after receipt of such claim. In
the event of any dispute or controversy as to the propriety or allowability of all or any portion of such claim under this paragraph,
such dispute or controversy shall be resolved and be decided by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth, and the decision by the
City Council of the City of Fort Worth shall be final and binding upon all parties to this contract
B-3 DUTIES OF THE ARCITECT As used herein, the term Architect means the Architect or his authorized representative.
Nothing contained in these Contract Documents shall create any privity of Contract between the Architect and the Contractor.
Page 2
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactory.com
B-4 ARCHITECT AS REPRESENTATIVE OF THE OWNER The Building Construction Manager will provide general
administration of the Contract on behalf of the Owner and will have authority to act as the representative of the Owner to the extent
provided in the Contract Documents unless changed in writing by the Owner. The Architect will be available for conferences and
consultations with the Owner or the Contractor at all reasonable times.
B-5 ACCESS TO JOB SITES . The Architect shall at all times have access to the Work whenever it is in preparation and
progress. The Contractor shall provide facilities for such access so the Architect may perform its assigned functions under the
Contract Documents.
The Architect will make periodic visits to the Site to familiarize himself with the progress and quality of the work and to determine if
the work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract documents. On the basis of on -site observations, the Architect will keep the
Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work of
the Contractor. Based upon such observations and the Contractor's applications for payments, the Building Construction Manager
will make determinations and recommendations concerning the amounts owing to the Contractor and will issue certificates for
payment amounts.
B-6 INTERPRETATION$ . The Architect will be, in the first instance, the interpreter of the requirements of the Plans and
Specifications and the judge of the performance thereunder by the Contractor, subject to the final decision of the Owner.
The Architects decisions in matters relating to artistic effect will be final if consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents.
B-7 AUTHORITY TO STOP WORK The BCM will have authority to reject work that does not conform to the Plans and
Specifications. In addition, whenever, in its reasonable opinion, the BCM considers it necessary or advisable in order to insure the
proper realization of the intent of the Plans and Specifications, the BCM will have authority to require the Contractor to stop the
Work or any portion thereof, or to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not such Work be then fabricated,
installed or completed.
B-8 MISCELLANEOUS DUTIES OF ARCHITECT
Shoo Drawinos. The Architect will review Shop Drawings and Samples. Two copies of each approved Shop Drawing and submittal
will be provided to the Owner by the Architect. Three copies will be returned to the Contractor.
Chanoe Orders. Change Orders and Field Orders for Minor Changes in the Work will be issued by the Owner
„ Guarantees. The Owner will receive all written guarantees and related documents required of the Contractor. Upon completion of
the project the Contractor shall provide the Owner five copies of each guarantee.
Inspections The Owner will conduct inspections for the purpose of determining and making his recommendations concerning the
dates of substantial completion and final completion. The Architect will conduct the final acceptance inspection and issue the
Certificate of Completion.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals The Owner will receive six copies of all applicable equipment installation, operation, and
maintenance brochures and manuals required of the Contractor.
B-9 TERMINATION OF THE ARCHITECT . In case of the termination of the employment of the Architect by the Owner, the
Owner shall either assume the duties of the Architect through the Director of the Department of Transportation and Public Works, or
shall appoint a successor Architect against whom the Contractor makes no reasonable objection.
SECTION C
OWNER
C-1 IDENTIFICATION By the term Owner is meant the City of Fort Worth acting herein by its duly authorized representatives
in the manner provided by law. Authorized representatives include the City Manager, Assistant City Manager, the Director and of
Transportation and Public Works Department and members of the Facilities Management Division. Generally speaking a
designated representative will be a Building Construction Manager identified from within the Facilities Management Group to act as
a point of contact for day-to-day contract administration.
C-2 DUTIES OF THE OWNER . The Owner shall furnish surveys describing the physical characteristics, legal limits and utility
locations for the site of the Work; provided, however, that the Contractor hereby covenants that he has inspected the premises and
familiarized himself therewith and that the locations of utilities and other obstacles to the prosecution of the Work as shown on the
Owner's survey are for information only, are not binding upon the Owner, and the Owner shall not incur any liability for loss or
damage by virtue of any inaccuracies or deficiencies in such surveys. The Owner shall secure and pay for title to the site and all
necessary permanent or construction easements. The Owner will cooperate with the Contractor in the prosecution of the Work in
such manner and to such extent as may be reasonable and shall furnish information under its control with reasonable promptness at
the request of the Contractor.
C-3 INSTRUCTIONS . The Owner shall issue all instructions to the Contractor through the BCM.
Page 3
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.t)dffactorv.com
C-4 ACCESS TO JOB SITE . The Owner shall at all times have access to the Work whenever it is in preparation and
progress. The Contractor shall provide facilities for such access so the Owner may perform its assigned functions under the
Contract Documents.
C-5 PROGRESS INSPECTIONS . The Owner will make visits to the Site to familiarize themselves with the progress and
quality of the Work and to determine if the work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract documents. On the basis of on -site
observations and reports concerning the progress and quality of the work, the Owner will approve and authorize the Contractor's
applications for payments.
C-6 AUTHORITY TO STOP WORK . The Owner will have authority to reflect work that does not conform to the Plans and
Specifications. Whenever, in its reasonable opinion, the Owner considers it necessary or advisable in order to insure the proper
realization of the intent of the Plans and Specifications, the Owner will have authority to require the Contractor to stop the work or
any portion thereof, or to require the Contractor to stop the Work or any portion thereof, or to require special inspection or testing of
the Work whether or not such Work be then fabricated, installed or completed.
C-7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION . Upon agreement of the Contractor and Architect that the Work is
substantially complete, the Owner will schedule a Substantial Completion Inspection to be conducted by the Architect and attended
by representatives of the Architect, Owner and Contractor. Items identified during this inspection as being incomplete, defective or
deficient shall be incorporated into a punch list and attached to the AIA document G704, which is to be prepared and signed by the
Contractor, and accepted, approved and signed by the Owner.
C-8 RIGHT TO AUDIT:
Contractor agrees that the City shall, until the expiration of three years after final payment under this contract, have access to and
the right to examine any directly pertinent books, documents, papers and records of the contractor involving transactions relating to
this contract
Contractor further agrees to include in all his subcontracts hereunder a provision to the effect that the subcontractor agrees that the
City shall, until the expiration of three years after final payment under the subcontract, have access to and the right to examine any
directly pertinent books, documents, papers and records of such subcontractor, involving transactions to the subcontract. The term
"subcontract" as used herein includes purchase orders.
Contractor agrees to photocopy such documents as may be requested by the city. The city agrees to reimburse Contractor for the
costs of copies at the rate published in the Texas Administrative Code.
r_1%
SECTION D
CONTRACTOR
D-1 IDENTIFICATION . The Contractor is the person or organization identified as such in the Contract. The term Contractor
means the Contractor or his authorized representative.
D-2 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor shall perform all work and services hereunder as an independent contractor,
not as agent, or employee of the City. Contractor shall have exclusive control of and the exclusive right to control the details of the
work and services performed hereunder, and all persons performing same, and Contractor shall be solely responsible for the acts
of its officers, agents, and employees. Nothing herein shall be construed as creating a partnership or joint enterprise between City
and the Contractor, its officers, agents and employees, and the doctrine of respondeat superior shall not apply.
D-3 SUBLETTING It is further agreed that the performance of this Contract, either in whole or in part, shall not be sublet or
assigned to anyone else by said Contractor without the written consent of the Director of Transportation and Public Works of the,
City of Fort Worth.
D-4 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Agreement, Conditions
of the Contract, Drawings, Specifications, Addenda and modifications and shall at once report to the Owner and to the Architect any
error, inconsistency or omission he may discover. The Contractor shall do no work without Drawings, Specifications and
Interpretations.
D-5 SUPERVISION The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using his best skill and attention. He shall be solely
responsible for all construction means, methods, safety, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of
the Work under the Contract Documents. "
D-6 LABOR AND MATERIALS . Unless otherwise specifically noted, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor,
materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation and other facilities and
services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work.
The successful low bidder will use its reasonable best efforts to hire local laborers, workmen and materialmen. The general
condition is not to be constructed as limiting the right of any bidder to employee laborers, workmen or materialmen from outside
local area.
The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among his employees, and shall not employ on the Work
any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the task assigned to him.
Page 4
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.r)dffactorv.com
D-7 PREVAILING WAGE RATE . The Contractor agrees to pay not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages
for Work of a similar character in the locality in which the Work is performed, and not less than the general prevailing wage of per
diem wages for a legal holiday and overtime work to all laborers, workmen and mechanics employed on the Work under this
Contract_ The Contractor agrees to pay at least the minimum wage per hour for all labor as the same is classified and set out by the
City of Fort Worth, Texas, a copy of which is attached hereto and made a part hereof the same as if it were copies verbatim herein.
D-8 WARRANTY . The Contractor warrants to the Owner and the Architect that all materials and equipment furnished under
this Contract will be new unless otherwise specified, and that all work will be of good quality, free from faults and defects, and in
conformance with the Contract Documents. All work not so conforming to these standards may be considered defective. If required
by the Architect or the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and
equipment
The warranty provided in this Section shall be in addition to and not in limitation of any other warranty or remedy provided by law or
the Contract Documents.
D-9 TAXES The Contractor is exempt from State Sales Tax on material incorporated into the finished construction, Excise
and Use Tax.
D-10 LICENSES. NOTICES AND FEES . The Contractor shall obtain all Permits, Licenses, Certificates, and Inspections,
whether permanent or temporary, required by law or these Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall give all Notices and comply with all Laws, Ordinances, Rules, Regulations and Orders of any public authority
bearing on the performance of the Work. If the Contractor observes or becomes aware that any of the Contract Documents are at
variance therewith in any respect, he shall promptly notify the Architect Owner in writing and any necessary changes will be made. If
the Contractor performs any Work knowing that it is in violation of, or contrary to, any of such Laws, Statutes, Charter, Ordinances,
Orders or Directives, or Regulations without furnishing Notice to the Owner, the Contractor will assume full responsibility therefore
and bear all costs attributable thereto.
D-11 CASH ALLOWANCES . The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract
Documents. These allowances shall cover the net cost of the materials and equipment delivered and unloaded at the site, and all
applicable taxes. The Contractor's handling costs on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses
contemplated for the original allowance shall be included in the Contractor Sum and not in the allowance. The Contractor shall
cause the Work covered by these allowances to be performed for such amounts and by such persons as the Owner may direct, but
he will not be required to employ persons against whom he makes a reasonable objection. If the cost, when determined, is more
than or less than the allowance, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order which will include additional
handling costs on the site, labor, installation costs, field overhead, profit and other direct expenses resulting to the Contractor from
any increase over the original allowance.
D-12 SUPERINTENDENT . The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in
attendance at the Project site during the progress of the Work. The superintendent shall be satisfactory to the Contractor and the
Owner. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor and all communications given to the superintendent shall be binding as if
given to the Contractor. Important communications will be confirmed in writing. Other communications will be so confirmed on
written request in each case.
D-13 RESPONSIBILITIES FOR EMPLOYEES AND SUB -CONTRACTORS . The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner
for the acts and omissions of all his employees and all Sub -contractors, their agents and employees, and all other persons
performing any of the Work under a contract with the Contractor.
D-14 FAILURE TO COMMENCE WORK : Should the Contractor fail to begin the work herein provided for within the time
herein fixed or to carry on and complete the same according to the true meaning of the intent and terms of said Plans, Specifications
and Contract Documents, then the Owner shall have the right to either demand the surety to take over the work and complete same
in accordance with the Contract Documents or to take charge of and complete the work in such a manner as it may deem proper,
and if, in the completion thereof, the cost to the said City shall exceed the contract price or prices set forth in the said plans and
specifications made a part hereof, the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay said City on demand in writing, setting forth and
specifying an itemized statement of the total cost thereof, said excess cost.
D-15 PROGRESS SCHEDULE . The Contractor, immediately after being awarded the contract, shall prepare and submit for
the Architects approval, an estimated progress schedule for the Work. The progress schedule shall be related to the entire Project.
This schedule shall indicate the dates for the starting and completion of the various states of construction and shall be revised as
required by the conditions of the Work, subject to the Architect's approval. It shall also indicate the dates for submission and
approval of shop drawings and submittals as well as the delivery schedule for major pieces of equipment and/or materials.
The contractor shall submit an updated progress schedule the BCM at least monthly for approval along with the Contractor's
monthly progress payment requests.
D-16 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS AT THE SITE . The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one copy of
all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, approved Shop Drawings, Change Orders, and other Changes and Amendments in good
order and marked to record all changes made during construction. These shall also be available to the Architect. The Drawings,
marked to record all changes made during construction, shall be delivered to the Owner upon completion of the Work. The Architect
will prepare, and provide to the Owner, one complete set of reproducible record drawings of the work.
Page 5
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.r)dffactorv.com n
D-17 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES . Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance
charts, brochures and other data which are prepared by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor,
and which illustrate some portion of the Work.
Samples are physical examples furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship, and to establish
standards by which the Work will be judged.
The Contractor shall review, stamp with his approval and submit, with reasonable promptness and in orderly sequence so as to
cause no delay in the Work or in the work of any other contractor, normally within the first 90 days of the work, six copies of all shop
Drawings and Samples required by the Contract Documents or subsequently by the Architect as covered by changes or
amendments. Shop Drawings and Samples shall be properly identified as specified, or as the Architect may require. At the time of
submission the Contractor shall inform the Architect in writing of any deviation in the Shop Drawings or Samples from the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
By approving and submitting Shop Drawings and Samples, the Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and verified
all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers and similar data, and that he has checked and
coordinated each shop drawing given in the Contract Documents. The Architect's approval of a separate item shall not indicate
approval of an assembly in which the item functions.
The Architect will review and approve Shop Drawings and Samples with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay, but only
for conformance with the design concept of the Project and with the information given in the Contract Documents. The Architect's
approval of a separate item shall not indicate approval of an assembly in which the item functions.
The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the Architect and shall resubmit the required number of corrected copies of
Shop Drawings or new Samples until approved. The Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing or on resubmitted Shop
Drawings to revisions other than the corrections requested by the Architect on previous submissions.
The Architect's approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any deviation from the
requirements of the Contract Documents unless the Contractor has informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of
submission and the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation. Architect's approval shall not relieve the
Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings or Samples.
No portion of the Work requiring a Shop Drawing or Sample submission shall be commenced until the Architect has approved the
submittal. All such portions of the Work shall be in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and Samples.
D-18 SITE USE . The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the
Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with any materials or equipment Until acceptance of the work by
the City Council of the City of Fort Worth, the entire site of the Work shall be under the exclusive control, care and responsibility of
the Contractor. Contractor shall take every precaution against injury or damage to persons or property by the action of the elements
or from any other cause whatsoever. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore and make good at his own expenses all injuries or
damages to any portions of the Work occasioned by any of the above, caused before acceptance.
D-19 CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK . The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of his Work that may
required to make its several parts fit together properly, and shall not endanger any Work by cutting, excavating or otherwise altering
the Work or any part of it.
D-20 CLEAN UP The Contractor at all times shall keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish. At
the completion of the Work he shall remove all his waste materials and rubbish from and about the Project as well as all his tools,
construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials, and shall clean all glass surfaces and leave the Work'Broom-clean' or its
equivalent, except at otherwise specified. In addition to removal of rubbish and leaving the buildings 'broom -dean", Contractor shall
clean all glass, replace any broken glass, remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorated work, clean hardware, remove paint
spots and smears from all surfaces, clean fixtures and wash all concrete, tile and terrazzo floors.
If the Contractor fails to dean up, the Owner may do so, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. �-
D-21 COMMUNICATIONS . As a general rule, the Contractor shall forward all communications to the Owner through the BCM.
D-22 CONTRACTOR REUIREMENTS ON FEDERALLY FUNDED PROJECTS. Contractor shall observe and comply with
the requirements of the City of Fort Worth Fiscal Department, Intergovernmental Affairs and Grants Management as outlined in the
Supplemental Conditions contained in the Project Manual
SECTION E
SUBCONTRACTORS
E-1 DEFINITION . A Subcontractor is a person or organization that has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform any of
the Work at the site. The term Subcontractor is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and
masculine in gender and means a Subcontractor or his authorized representative.
Nothing contained in the Contract, Documents shall create any contractual relation between the Owner and the Architect and any
subcontractor or any of his sub -subcontractors or materialmen.
Page 6
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/1412005
PDF�created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.r)dffactorv.com
E-2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS . The bidder shall furnish a list of the names of the subcontractors or other persons or
organizations (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for such portions
of the Work as may be designated in the bidding requirements, or if none is so designated in the bidding requirements, the names of
the Subcontractors proposed for the principal portions of the Work. Prior to the award of the Contract, the Architect shall notify the
successful bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any person or
organization on such list. Failure of the Owner and Architect to make an objection to any person or organization on the list prior to
the award of this Contract shall not constitute acceptance of such person or organization.
If, prior to the award of the Contract, the Owner or Architect has an objective to any person or organization on such list, and refuses
to accept such person or organization, the apparent low bidder may, prior to the award, withdraw his bid without forfeiture of bid
security. If such bidder submits an acceptable substitute, the Owner may, at its discretion, accept the bid or he may disqualify the
bid. If, after the award, the Owner or Architect objects in writing to any person or organization on such list, the Contractor shall
provide an acceptable substitute.
The Contractor shall not make any substitution for any Subcontractor or person or organization that has been accepted by the
Owner and the Architect, unless the substitution is also acceptable to the Owner and the Architect.
E-3 TERMS OF SUBCONTRACTS . All work performed for the Contractor by a Subcontractor shall be pursuant to an
appropriate agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor (and where appropriate between Subcontractors and Sub -
subcontractors) which shall contain provisions that:
1. Preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and the Architect under the Contract with respect to the Work to be performed
under the subcontract so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights;
2. Require that such Work be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents;
3. Require submission to the Contractor of applications for payment under each subcontract to which the Contractor is a party, in
reasonable time to enable the Contractor to apply for payment;
4. Require that all claims for additional costs, extensions of time, damages for delays or otherwise with respect to subcontracted
portions of the Work shall be submitted to the Contractor (via any Subcontractor or Sub -subcontractor where appropriate) in
the manner provided in the Contract Documents for like claims by the Contractor upon the Owner;
5. Waive all rights the contracting parties may have against one another for damages caused by fire or other perils covered by the
property insurance, except such rights. if any, as they may have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner, and,
6. Obligate each Subcontractor specifically to consent to the provisions of this Section
All of the provisions set out in this section shall be deemed to have been included in every subcontract, and every subcontract shall
be so construed and applied as to the Owner and the Architect, whether or not such provisions are physically included in the sub-
contract.
E-4 MINORITY AND WOMENS BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (M/WBE). Should the base bid be less than $25,000, the
requirements of this section do not apply.
General: In accordance with City of Fort Worth Ordinance No 15530, the City of Fort Worth sets goals for the participation of
minority business enterprises and women business enterprises in City contracts. Ordinance No 15530 is incorporated in these
Specifications by reference. A copy of the Ordinance may be obtained from the Office of the City Secretary. Failure to comply with
the Ordinance shall be a material breach of contract.
Prior to Award: The M/WBE UTILIZATION FORM, M/WBE GOALS WAIVER FORM and GOOD FAITH EFFORT FORM, as
applicable, must be submitted within five city business days after bid opening. Failure to submit the post bid information shall render
the bid non -responsive. The City will consider the contractor's performance on other City Projects regarding its MANBE program in
the evaluation of bids. Failure to comply with the City's MMIBE program, or to demonstrate a "good faith effort", shall result in a bid
being considered irresponsible.
During Construction: Contractor shall provide copies of subcontracts or cosigned letters of intent with approved M/WBE
subcontractors prior to issuance of the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall also provide monthly reports on utilization of the
subcontractors to the Construction Manager. Upon request, Contractor must provide the City with complete and accurate
information regarding actual work performed by a Minority or Women Business Enterprise (MMIBE) on the contract and proof of
payment thereof. Contractor further agrees to permit an audit and/or examination of any books, records or files in its possession
that will substantiate the actual work performed by an M/ WBE. The misrepresentation of acts (other than a negligent
misrepresentation) and/or the commission of fraud by the Contractor will be grounds for termination of the contract and/or initiating
action under appropriate federal, state, or local laws or ordinances relating to false statement. Further any such misrepresentation
(other than a negligent misrepresentation) and/or commission of fraud will result on the Contractor being determined to be
irresponsible and barred from participating in City work for a period of time of not less than three years.
The Contractor may count first and second tier subcontractors and/or suppliers toward meeting the goals. The Contractor may
count toward its goal a portion of the total dollar amount of the contract with a joint venture equal to the percentage of the M/WBE
participation in the joint venture for a clearly defined portion of the work to be performed. All subcontractors used in meeting the
goals must be certified prior to the award of the Contract.
Page 7
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
1 2I !n i1y
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.i)dffactorv.com 71
Change Orders: Whenever a change order affects the work of an M/WBE subcontractor or supplier, the M/WBE shall be given an
opportunity to perform the work. Whenever a change order is $50,000 or more, the M/WBE coordinator shall determine the goals
applicable to the work to be performed under the change order.
During the term of the contract the contractor shall:
1. Make no unjustified changes of deletions in its M/WBE participation commitments submitted with or subsequent to the bid, y
and,
2. If substantial subcontracting and/or substantial supplier opportunities arise during the term of the contract which the contractor
had represented he would perform with his forces, the contractor shall notify the City before subcontracts or purchase orders
are let, and shall be required to comply with modifications to goals as determined by the City, and,
3. Submit a REQUEST FOR APPROVAL OF CHANGE FORM, if the contractor desires to change or delete any of the M/WBE
subcontractors or suppliers.
Justification for change of subcontractors may be granted for the following:
1. Failure of subcontractor to provide evidence of coverage by Workers' Compensation Insurance
2. Failure of subcontractor to provide required general liability or other insurance.
3. Failure of subcontractor to execute a standard subcontract form in the amount of the proposal used by the Contractor in
preparing his MM/BE Participation plan
4. Default by the M/WBE subcontractor or supplier in the performance of the subcontract
5.Other reasons at the discretion of the M/WBE Coordinator
Within ten days after final payment from the City the contractor shall provide the M/WBE Office with documentation to reflect final
participation of each subcontractor and supplier, including non M/MBEs, used on the project
E-£i PAYMENTS TO SUBCONTRACTORS . The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the
Owner, an amount equal to the percentage of completion allowed to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's Work. The
Contractor shall also require each Subcontractor to make similar payments to his subcontractors.
If the Owner refuses to issue a Certificate for Payment for any cause which is the fault of the Contractor and not the fault of a
particular subcontractor, the Contractor shall pay that Subcontractor on demand, made at any fime after the Certificate for Payment
would otherwise have been issued, for his Work to the extent completed, less the retained percentage.
The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor a just share of any insurance monies received by the Contractor, and he shall require
each Subcontractor to make similar payments to his Subcontractors.
The Owner may, on request and at its discretion, furnish to any Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of
completion certified to the Contractor on account of Work done by such Subcontractors.
Neither the Owner nor the Architect shall have any obligation to pay or to see to the payment of any monies to any Subcontractor.
E-6 SUBCONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR EDA FUNDED PROJECTS
The Contractor will cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts to bind subcontractors to FDA contract
requirements as contained herein and to 15 CFR 24 or OMB Circular A-110, as appropriate.
Each subcontractor must agree to comply with all applicable Federal, State, and local requirements in addition to those set forth in ..�
this section.
No subcontractor will be employed on this Project, except as specifically approved by the City, who is contained in the listing of
contractors debarred, ineligible, suspended or indebted to the United States from contractual dealings with Federal government
departments. The work performed by any such contractor or subcontractor will be ineligible for reimbursement wholly or partially
from EDA grant fluids.
All subcontracts in excess of $10,000 shall include, or incorporate by reference, the equal opportunity clause of Executive Order
11246.
All subcontracts must contain a nondiscrimination clause.
Each subcontract must contain a requirement for compliance with the Davis -Bacon and related acts
Page 8
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.r)dffactorv.com
Each subcontractor must submit weekly each weekly payroll record and a weekly statement of compliance. These documents will
be submitted to the prime contractor who will compile them and submit to the City. The subcontractor can satisfy this requirement by
submitting a properly executed Department of Labor Form WH-347
Each subcontract with every subcontractor must contain a clause committing the subcontractor to employment of local labor to the
maximum extent possible.
All subcontractors who employ more than 50 employees, and is a prime or first tier subcontractor, and has a subcontract or
purchase order of $50,000 or more must submit a completed Standard Form 100 (Compliance Report) by March 30 of each year.
Subcontractors performing work in areas covered by published goals for minorities will be required to report monthly on Form CC-
257,
SECTION F
SEPARATE CONTRACTS
F-1 OWNER'S RIGHT . The Owner reserves the right to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the
Work. When separate contract are awarded for other portions of the Work, "the Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case
shall be the contractor who signs each separate contract.
F-2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTORS. The Contractor shall afford other contractors reasonable opportunity
for the introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and the execution of their work, and shall properly connect and
coordinate his work with theirs.
If any part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of any other separate contractor, the
Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Owner any apparent discrepancies or defects in such work that render it
unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor to inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the
other contractor's work as fit and proper to receive his Work, except as to defects which may develop in the other separate
contractor's work after the execution of the Contractor's Work.
Should the Contractor cause damage to the work or property of any separate contractor on the site, the Contractor shall, upon due
notice, settle with such other contractor by agreement, if he will so settle. If such separate contractor sues the Owner on account of
any damage alleged to have been so sustained, the Owner shall notify the Contractor who shall defend against such suit at the
Contractor's expense, and if any judgment against the Owner arises therefrom, the Contractor shall pay or satisfy such judgment
and shall reimburse the Owner for all attorney's fees, court costs and expenses which the Owner has incurred in connection with
such suit.
F3 CUTTING AND PATCHING UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS . The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of
his Work that may be required to fit it to receive or be received by the work of other contractors shown in the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall not endanger any work or any other contractors by cutting, excavating or otherwise altering any work and shall
not cut or alter the work of any other contractor except with the written consent of the Architect.
Any costs caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by the party responsible therefor.
F-4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP . If a dispute arises between the separate contractors as to their responsibility for
cleaning up, the Owner may clean up and charge the cost thereof to the several contractors as the Director of the Department of
Transportation and Public Works shall determine to be just
SECTION G
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
G-1 CONFLICT OF LAWS . The law of the place where the site is located shall govern the Contract. The Contractor must
familiarize himself and strictly comply with all Federal, State, and County and City Laws, Statutes, Charter, Ordinances, Regulations,
or Directives controlling the action or operation of those engaged upon the work affecting the materials used. He shall indemnify and
save harmless the City and all of its officers and agents against any claim or liability arising from or based on the violation of any
such Laws, Statutes, Charter, Ordinances, Regulations, or Directives, whether by himself. his employees, agents or subcontractors.
G-2 GOVERNING LAWS . It is mutually agreed and understood that this agreement is made and entered into by the parties
hereto with reference to the existing Charter and Ordinances of the City of Fort Worth and the laws of the State of Texas with
reference to and governing all matters affecting this Contract, and the Contractor agrees to fully comply with all the provisions of the
same.
G-3 PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS . In performing their duties under the Statutes of the State of Texas and
the Charter and Ordinances of the City of Fort Worth in connection with this Contract, or in exercising any of the powers granted the
Owner herein, the officers, agents and employees of the City of Fort Worth are engaged in the performance of a governmental
function and shall not incur any personal liability by virtue of such performance hereunder, except for gross negligence or willful
wrong.
rw G-4 COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS . Contractor agrees the comply with all laws, Federal, state and local, including all
ordinances, rules and regulations of the City of Fort Worth, Texas. Materials incorporated into the finished Project are not subject to
State Sales Tax.
Page 9
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.t)dffactorv.com
Contractors are responsible for obtaining construction permits from the governing agencies. Contractor shall schedule all code
inspections with the Code Inspection Division in accordance with the permit requirements and submit a copy of updated schedule to
the Construction manager weekly. Building, plumbing, electrical and mechanical building permits are issued without charge. Water
and sewer access fees will be paid by the City. Any other permit fees are the responsibility of the Contractor.
G-5 INDEMNIFICATION : Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify City's engineer and architect, and their personnel at
the project site for Contractor's sole negligence. In addition, Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify, hold harmless and
defend, at its own expense, the Owner, its officers, servants and employees, from and against any and all claims or suits for
property loss, property damage, personal injury, including death, arising out of, or alleged to arise out of, the work and services to be
performed hereunder by Contractor, its officers, agents, employees, subcontractors, licensees or invitees, whether or not anv such
iniurv, damage or death is caused. in whole or in Dart, by the nealiaence or alleaed nealiaence of Owner. its officers.
servants. or emplovees. Contractor likewise covenants and agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from and against
any and all injuries to Owner's officers, servants and employees and any damage, loss or destruction to property of the Owner
arising from the performance of any of the terms and conditions of this Contract, whether or not anv such iniury or damage is
caused in whole or in Dart by the nealiaence or alleaed nealiaence of Owner. its officers. servants or emplovees.
In the event Owner receives a written claim for damages against the Contractor or its subcontractors prior to final payment, final
payment shall not be made until Contractor either (a) submits to Owner satisfactory evidence that the claim has been settled and/or
a release from the claimant involved, or (b) provides Owner with a letter from Contractor's liability insurance carrier that the claim
has been referred to the insurance carrier.
The Director may, if he deems it appropriate, refuse to accept bids on other City of Fort Worth public work from a Contractor against
whom a claim for damages is outstanding as a result of work performed under a City Contract.
G-6 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS . Except as provided in Paragraph E-2, this contract shall be binding upon and insure to
the benefit of the parties hereto, their Successors or Assigns. Contractor shall not assign or sublet all or any part of this Contract or
his rights or duties hereunder without the prior written consent of the Owner. Any such purported assignment or subletting without
the prior written consent of Owner shall be void.
G-7 WRITTEN NOTICE . Written Notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or
member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified
mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice.
G-8 SURETY BONDS : Surety Bonds are required on all City contracts in excess of $25,000. The Contractor agrees, on the
submittal of his Proposal to make, execute and deliver to said City of Fort Worth good and sufficient surety bonds for the faithful
performance of the terns and stipulations of the Contract and for the payment to all claimants for labor and/or materials furnished in
the prosecution of the work, such bonds being as provided and required in Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas, as
amended, in the form included in the Contract Documents, and such bonds shall be 100 percent of the total contract price, and the
said surety shall be a surety company duty and legally authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and acceptable to the City
Council of the City of Fort Worth.
Bonds shall be made on the forms fumished by or otherwise acceptable to the City. Each bond shall be properly executed by both
the Contractor and the Surety Company. Bonds required by the City shall be in compliance with all relevant local, state and federal
statutes.
To be an acceptable surety on the bond the name of the surety should be included on the current U. S. Treasury List of Acceptable
Securities [Circular 570], and must be authorized to do business in Texas. Sureties not listed in Circular 570 may write performance
and payment bonds on a project without reinsurance to the limit of 10 percent of its capital and surplus. Such a surety must reinsure
any obligation over 10 percent The amount in excess of 10 percent must be reinsured by reinsurers who are duly authorized,
accredited, or trusteed to do business in the State of Texas.
Should any surety for the contracted project be determined unsatisfactory at any time during same, the Contractor shall immediately
provide a new surety bond satisfactory to the City.
If the contract amount is less than $25,000, payment shall be made in one lump sum 30 calendar days after completion and
acceptance of the work.
G-9 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK . If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents or fails to perform any provision of the Contract the Owner may, without prejudice to any
other remedy he may have, enter the site and make good such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be
issued deducting from the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies, including the cost
of the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. If the payments then or thereafter due the
Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contract shall pay the difference to the Owner.
G-10 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS . The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. He shall defend all suits or claims
for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the Owner harmless from loss on account thereof and shall be responsible for all
such loss when a particular design, process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified; however, if the
Contractor has reason to believe that the design, process or product specified is an infringement of a patent. he shall be responsible
for such loss unless he promptly gives such information to Owner.
Page 10
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactorv.com
G-11 TESTS If the Contract Documents, laws, Ordinances, Rules, Regulations or Orders of any public authority having
jurisdiction require any Work to be inspected, tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness
and the date arranged so the Architect may observe such inspection, testing or approval. The Owner shall bear all costs of such
inspection, tests and approvals unless otherwise provided.
If after the commencement of the Work, the Owner determine that any Work requires special inspection, testing or approval not
included above, the Owner, upon written authorization from the Owner, will instruct the Contractor to order such special inspection,
testing or approval, and the Contractor shall give notice as required in the preceding paragraph. If such special inspection or testing
reveals a failure of the Work to comply (1) with the requirements of the Contract Documents or (2) with respect to the performance
of the work, with Laws, Statutes, Charter, Ordinances, Regulations or Orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, the
Contractor shall bear all costs thereof, including the Architect's additional services made necessary by such costs; otherwise the
Owner shall bear such costs, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued.
The Contractor shall secure certificate of inspection, testing or approval, and three copies will be promptly delivered by him to the
Owner. The Architect will review the certificates and forward one copy of each with his recommendation(s) to the Owner.
If the Owner wishes to observe the inspections, tests or approvals required by this Section, they will do so promptly and, where
practicable, at the source of supply.
Neither the observations of the Architect or the Owner in their administration of the Construction Contract, nor inspections, tests or
approvals by persons other than the Contractor shall relieve the Contractor from his obligations to perform the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
G-12 INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES SERVICES . The Contractor shall perform the work under this Contract with a
minimum of outage time for all utilities. Interruption shall be by approved sections of the utility. In some cases, the Contractor may
be required to perform the work while the existing utility is in service. The existing utility service may be interrupted only when
m approved by the Owner. When it is necessary to interrupt the existing utilities, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing at least
ten days in advance of the time that he desires the existing service to be interrupted. The interruption time shall be kept to a
minimum. Depending upon the activities at an existing facility that requires continuous service from the existing utility, an interruption
may not be subject to schedule at the time desired by the Contractor. In such cases, the interruption may have to be scheduled at a
time of minimum requirements of demand for the utility. The amount of time requested by the Contractor of existing utility services
shall be as approved by the Owner.
LZI
G-13 LAYING OUT WORK . The Contractor shall verify dimensions and elevations indicated in layout of existing work.
Discrepancies between Drawings, Specifications, and existing conditions shall be referred to Architect for adjustment before work
affected is performed. Failure to make such notification shall place responsibility upon Contractor to carry out work in satisfactory
workmanlike manner at the Contractor's sole expense.
The Contractor shall be held responsible for the location and elevation of all the construction contemplated by the Construction
Documents.
Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall carefully compare and check all Architectural, Structural, Mechanical an Electrical
drawings; each with the other that in any affects the locations or elevation of the work to be executed by him, and should any
discrepancy be found, he shall immediately report the same to the Architect for verification and adjustment. Any duplication of work
made necessary by failure or neglect on his part to comply with this function shall be done at the contractors sole expense.
G-14 MEASUREMENTS: Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements at the
site or at the building and shall be wholly responsible for the correctness of same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed
on account of any difference between actual dimensions and dimensions indicated on the drawings. Any difference that may be
found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration and adjustment before proceeding with the project
G-16 EXISTING OVERHEAD OR UNDERGROUND WORK. The Contractor shall carefully check the site where the project is
to be erected and observe any existing overhead wires and equipment Any such work shall be moved, replaced or protected, as
required, whether or not shown or specified at the contractor's sole expense.
Attention is directed to the possible existence of pipe and other underground improvements that may or may not be shown on the
Drawings. All reasonable precautions shall be taken to preserve and protect any such improvements whether or not shown on the
Drawings.
Location of existing underground lines, shown the Drawings are based on the best available sources, but are to be regarded as
approximate only. Exercise extreme care in locating and identifying these lines before excavation in adjacent areas.
G-16 ALIGNMENT OF JOINTS IN FINISH MATERIALS It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain in the
installation of jointed floor, wall and ceiling materials that:
1. Preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and the Architect under the Contract with respect to the Work to be performed
under the subcontract so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights;
2. Place joints to relate to all opening and breaks in the structure and be symmetrically placed wherever possible. This includes
heating registers, light fixtures, equipment, etc.
Page 11
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.r)dffactorv.com
If because of the non -related sizes of the various materials and locations of openings, etc., it is not possible to accomplish the
above, the Contractor shall request the Architect to determine the most satisfactory arrangement. The Contractor shall establish
centerlines for all trades.
G-17 INTEGRATING EXISTING WORK The Contractor shall protect all existing street and other improvements from
damages.
Contractor's operations shall be confined to the immediate vicinity of the new work and shall not in any interfere with or obstruct the
ingress or egress to an from existing adjacent facilities.
Where new site work is to be connected to existing work, special care shall be exercised by the Contractor not to disturb or damage
the existing work more than necessary. All damaged work shall be replaced, repaired and restored to its original condition at no cost
to the Owner.
G-18. HAZARDOUS MATERIAL CERTIFICATION : It is the intent of the contract documents, whether expressly stated or not,
that nothing containing hazardous materials, such as asbestos, shall be incorporated in to the project The contractor shall exercise
every reasonable precaution to ensure that asbestos -containing materials are not incorporated into any portion of the project,
including advising all materials suppliers and subcontractors of this requirement. The contractor shall verify that components
containing lead do not contact the potable water supply.
G-19 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING . Drawing showing location of equipment, piping, ductwork, etc, are
diagrammatic and job conditions may not always permit their installation in the location shown. When this situation occurs, it shall be
brought to the Architect's attention immediately and the relocation determined in a joint conference. The Contractor will be held
responsible for the relocating of any items without first obtaining the Architect's approval. He shall remove and relocate such items
at his own expense if so directed by the Architect. Where possible uniform margins are to be maintained between parallel lines and
or adjacent wall, floor or ceiling surfaces.
G-20 OVERLOADING . The Contractor shall be responsible for loading of any part or parts of structures beyond their safe
carrying capacities by placing of materials, equipment, tools, machinery or any other item thereon. No loads shall be placed on
floors or roofs before they have attained their permanent and safe strength.
G-21 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS . Where it is required in the Specifications that materials, products, processes,
equipment, or the like be installed or applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, direction or specifications, or words to
this effect, it shall be construed to mean that said application or installation shall be in strict accordance with printed instructions
furnished by the manufacturer of the material concerned for use under conditions similar or those at the job site. Six copies of such
instructions shall be fumished to the Architect and his approval thereof obtained before work is begun.
G-22 CLEANING UP . The Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish caused by
employees or as a result of the work.
At completion of work, the General Contractor shall, immediately prior to final inspection of complete building, execute the following
final cleaning work with trained janitorial personnel and with material methods recommended by the manufactures of installed
materials.
1. Sweep and buff resilient floors and base, and vacuum carpeting.
2. Dust all metal and wood trim and similar finished materials.
3. Clean all cabinets and casework.
4. Dust all ceilings and walls.
5. Dust, and if necessary wash, all plumbing and electrical fixtures.
6. Wash all glass and similar non -resilient materials.
7. All hardware and other unpainted metals shall be cleaned and polished and all equipment and paint or decorated work shall be
cleaned and touched -up if necessary, and all temporary labels, tags, and paper coverings removed throughout the buildings.
Surfaces that are waxed shall be polished.
8. The exterior of the building, the grounds, approaches, equipment, sidewalks, streets; etc shall be cleaned similar to interior of
buildings and left in good order at the time of final acceptance. All paint surfaces shall be clean and unbroken, hardware shall
be clean and polished, all required repair work shall be completed and dirt areas shall be scraped and cleared of weed growth.
9. Clean all glass surfaces and mirrors of putty, paint materials, etc., without scratching or injuring the glass and leave the work
bright, clean and polished. Cost of this cleaning work shall be bome by Contractor.
10. Cleaning, polishing, scaling, waxing and all other finish operations indicated on the Drawings or required in the Specifications
shall be taken to indicate the required condition at the time of acceptance of all work under the Contract. *®
11. Burning: Burning of rubbish on the premises will not be permitted.
Page 12
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.r)dffactorv.com
G-23 DUST CONTROL . Precaution shall be exercised at all times to control dust created as a result of any operations during
the construction period. If serious problems or complaints arise due to air-bome dust, or when directed by the Architect, operations
causing such problems shall be temporarily discontinued and necessary steps taken to control the dust.
G-24 FIRE PROTECTION. The contractor shall at all times maintain good housekeeping practices to reduce the risk of fire
damage or injury to workmen. All scrap materials, rubbish and trash shall be removed daily from in and about the building and shall
IR not be permitted to be scattered on adjacent property.
Suitable storage space shall be provided outside the immediate building area for storing flammable materials and paints; no storage
will be permitted in the building. Excess flammable liquids being used inside the building shall be kept in dosed metal container and
removed from the building during unused periods.
A fire extinguisher shall be available at each location where cutting or welding is being performed. Where electric or gas welding or
cutting work is done, interposed shields of incombustible material shall be used to protect against fire damage due to sparks and hot
metal. When temporary heating devices are used, a watchman shall be present to cover periods when other workmen are not on the
premises.
The Contractor shall provide fire extinguishers in accordance with the recommendations and NFPA Bulletins Nos. 10 and 241.
However, in all cases a minimum of two fire extinguishers shall be available for each floor of construction.
G-25 CUTTING AND PATCHING Wherever cutting and removal of portions of the existing work is indicated, such work shall
be neatly sawed or cut by contractor in a manner that will produce a neat straight line, parallel to adjacent surfaces or plumb for
vertical surfaces. Care should be exercised not to damage any work that is to remain.
At no time shall any structural members be cut without written consent from the Architect.
G-26 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
Final Inspection. Record Drawinas : Attention is called to General Conditions Section entitled, 'Substantial Completion and Final
Payment'.
Maintenance Manual: Sheets shall be 8 %' x 11', except pull out sheets may be neatly folded to 8'/:' x 11'. Manuals shall be bound
in plastic covered, 3 ring, loose leaf binder with title of project lettered on front and shall contain:
mm 1) Name, address and trade of all sub -contractors.
2) Complete maintenance instructions; name, address, and telephone number of installing Contractor, manufacturer's local
representative, for each piece of operative equipment.
3) Catalog data on plumbing fixtures, valves, water heaters, heating and cooling equipment, temperature control, fan, electrical
panels, service entrance equipment and light fixtures.
4) Manufacturer's name, type, color designation for resilient floors, windows, doors, concrete block, paint, roofing, other materials.
Submit six copies of Maintenance Manual, prior to request for final payment.
Ooerational Inspection and Maintenance Instruction : The Contractor shall provide at his expense, competent manufacturer's
representatives to completely check out all mechanical and electrical systems and items covered by the Drawings and
Specifications. This requirement shall be scheduled just prior to and during the initial start up. After all systems are functioning
properly the representatives shall instruct maintenance personnel of the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of each
item.
G-27 GUARANTEE AND EXTENDED GUARANTEE . Upon completion of the Project, prior to final payment, guarantees
required by technical divisions of Specifications shall be properly executed in quadruplicate by subcontractors and submitted
through the Contractor to Architect. Delivery of guarantees shall not relieve Contractor from any obligation assumed under Contract
The Contractor shall guarantee the entire Project for one year. In addition, where separate guarantees, for certain portions of work,
are for longer periods, General Contractor's guarantee shall be extended to cover such longer periods. Manufacturer's extended
warrantees shall be included in this contract.
Guarantees shall become valid and operative and commence upon issuance of Certificate of Inspection and Acceptance by Owner.
Guarantees shall not apply to work where damage is result of abuse, neglect by Owner or his successor(s) in interest
The Contractor agrees to warrant his work and materials provided in accordance with this contract and the terms of the Technical
Specifications contained herein. Unless supplemented by the Technical Specifications or the manufacturers normal extended
warrantees, the Contractor shall warrant all work materials, and equipment against defects for a period of one year from the date of
final acceptance. The Contractor further agrees to bear all costs of making good all work that is found to be defective or not
E provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. Additionally if the facility or contents are damaged due to defective materials
or workmanship of the Contractor, the Contractor further agrees to bear all cost of repairing and/or replacing damaged items and
components to bring such items back to at least their original condition.
Page 13
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.t)dffactorv.com
G-28 RECORD DRAWINGS . Upon completion of the Work and prior to application for final payment, one print of each of the
drawings accompanying this specification shall be neatly and clearly marked in red by the Contractor to show variations between the
construction actually provided and that indicated or specified in the Contract Documents. The annotated documents shall be
delivered to Architect. Where a choice of materials and/or methods is permitted herein and where variations in the scope or
character of the work from the entire work indicated or specified are permitted either by award of bidding items specified for that
purpose, or by subsequent change to the drawings, the record drawings shall define the construction actually provided. The
representation of such variations shall conform to standard drafting practice and shall include supplementary notes, legends and
details which may be necessary for legibility and Gear portrayal of the actual construction. The record drawings shall indicate, in
addition, the actual location of all sub -surface utility lines, average depth below the surface and other appurtenances.
G-29 CONSTRUCTION FENCE . At the Contractor's option, he may provide a substantial chain -link construction fence around
all or a part of the site. The fences and gates must be maintained throughout the construction period. Remove the fences and gates
upon completion of the Project and restore the site to the required original or contract condition.
G-30 PRODUCT DELIVERY. STORAGE. HANDLING . The Contractor shall handle, store and protect materials and products,
including fabricated components, by methods and means which will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft (and
resulting delays), thereby ensuring highest quality results as the work progresses. Control delivery schedules so as to minimize
unnecessary long-term storage at project site prior to installation.
G-31 REMOVAL OF SALVAGED MATERIAL . The Contractor shall remove salvaged material and equipment from the Project
site and dispose of it in accordance with the law. Equipment or material identified in the Specifications or Plans for Owner salvage
shall be carefully removed and delivered to the Owner at any location in within the City limits as directed by the City.
G-32 MANUFACTURER'S REFERENCE: Catalog, brand names, and manufacturer's references are descriptive, not restrictive.
Bids on brands of like nature and quality will be considered. Contractor shall inform the City of any substitutions intended for the
project within 5 business days of bid opening. Failure to inform the City of substitute projects will obligate the contractor to provide
the specified material if awarded the contract. Within 14 days after bid opening and upon request of the contractor, the contractor
will submit a full sized sample and/or detailed information as required to allow the architect to determine the acceptability of
proposed substitutions. Where equipment has been listed as 'no substitute accepted', the City will accept no alternates to the
specified equipment.
SECTION H
CONTRACT TIME
H-1 DEFINITIONS
The Contract Time is the period of time allotted in the Contract Documents for completion of the Work and is the number of calendar
days elapsing between the date of commencement and the date of substantial Completion plus additional days assessed for failure
to complete punch list items from the Final Inspection in a timely manner
The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Notice to Proceed. If there is no notice to proceed, it shall be
the date of the Agreement or such other date as may be established therein. w,
The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof is the Date certified by the Architect with the approval
of the Owner that construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so the Owner may occupy the
Work or designated portion thereof for the use for which it is intended. Final acceptance of the completed work or any portion
thereof can be made only by the Assistant City Manager, and no other form of acceptance will be binding upon the Owner.
A calendar day constitutes 24 hours of time and is any one of the seven days of a week, including Sunday, regardless of whether a
'Working Day' or not, and regardless of weather conditions or any situation which might delay construction. An extension of contract
time shall be in accordance with this Section. Extensions of time will be as recommended by the BCM with final approval by City of
Fort Worth.
A working day is defined as a calendar day, not including Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays, in which weather or other
conditions not under the control of the Contractor permit the performance of work for a continuous period of not less than seven
hours between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. However, nothing in these Contract Documents shall be construed as prohibiting the
Contractor from working on Saturdays if he so desires. Legal holidays are defined as being New Year's Day, Independence Day,
Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, Memorial Day, and Veteran's Day.
H-2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION All the time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of essence to the Contract.
The Contractor shall begin the Work on the date of commencement as defined in this Section. He shall carry the Work forward
expeditiously with adequate forces and shall complete it within the Contract Time.
H-3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME . If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by any act or
neglect of the Owner or the Architect, or by any employee of the Owner, or by any separate contractor employed by the Owner, or
by any separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in
transportation, unavoidable casualties or any causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by any cause which the Architect
Page 14
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.r)dffactorv.com
determines may justify the delay, then the contract time may be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as
recommended by the Architect and approved by the Owner. When the Contractor is delayed due to abnormal weather conditions,
the weather table provided as WT-I in these Contract Documents shall be used as the basis for providing a fair and equitable
adjustment of the contract time.
All claims for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Architect no more than fifteen days after the occurrence of the delay;
otherwise they shall be waived.
If no schedule or agreement is made stating the dates upon which written interpretations shall be furnished, then no claim for delay
shall be allowed on account of failure to furnish such interpretation until fifteen days after demand is made for them, and not then
unless such a claim is reasonable.
H-4 NO DAMAGE FOR DELAY . No payment, compensation or adjustment or any kind (other than the extensions of time
provided for) shall be made to the contractor for damages because of hindrances or delays from an cause in the progress of the
work, whether such hindrances or delays be avoidable or unavoidable, and the contractor agrees that he will make no claim for
compensation, damages or mitigation of liquidated damages for any such delays, and will accept in full satisfaction for such delays
said extension of time.
SECTION I
PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
1-1 CONTRACT SUM The Contract Sum is stated in the contract and is the total amount payable by the Owner to the
Contractor for the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.
1-2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES . Before the first Applicable for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a Schedule
of Values of the various portions of the Work, including quantities if required by the Architect, aggregating the total Contract Sum,
divided so as to facilitate payments to Sub -contractors, prepared in such form as specified or as the Architect and the Contractor
may agree upon, and supported by such data to substantiate its correctness as the Architect may require. Each item in the
Schedule of Values shall include its proper share of overhead and profit. This Schedule, when approved by the Architect and the
Owner, shall be used as a basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment.
1-3 ADJUSTMENT OF QUANTITIES.
1-4 PROGRESS PAYMENTS . On the first day of each month after the first month's work has been completed, the Contractor
will make current estimates in writing for review by the Architect of materials in place complete and the amount of work performed
during the preceding month or period and the value thereof at the prices contracted for as shown on the approved Schedule of
Values and Progress Schedule.
If payments are to be made on account of materials or equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at
the site or in an independent, bonded warehouse such payments shall be conditioned upon submission by the Contractor of bills of
sale or such other procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials or equipment or otherwise
protect the Owner's interest including applicable insurance and transportation to the site.
The Contractor warrants and guarantees that titre to all Work, materials and equipment covered by an Application for Payment,
whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner upon the receipt of such payment by the Contractor, free and clear
of all liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances hereinafter referred to as "liens': and that no Work, materials or equipment
covered by an Application for Payment will have been acquired by the Contractor, or by any other persons performing the Work at
the site or furnishing materials and equipment for the Work, subject to an agreement under which an interest therein or an
encumbrance thereon is retained by the seller or otherwise imposed by the Contractor or such other person.
The Contractor shall prepare each application for payment on AIA Document G702, 'Application and Certificate for Payment', and
attached thereto AIA Document G703, 'Confinuation Sheet, to indicate the progress made to date and the period or month for
which payment is requested for each Item listed in the Schedule of Values. A copy of the revised monthly work progress schedule
must be attached before the pay request can be accepted.
1-5 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT . If the Contractor has made Application for Payment as above, the above, the Architect
will, with reasonable promptness but not more than seven days after the receipt of the Application, prepare a Certificate of Payment,
with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount determined to be properly due, or state in writing reasons for withholding a
Certificate.
The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Owner, based on the BCM's observations at the site
and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated; that the quality of the
Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole upon Substantial
Completion, to the results of any subsequent tests required by the Contract Documents, to minor deviations from the Contract
Documents correctable prior to completion, and to any specific qualifications stated in the Certificate); and recommendations to the
Owner that the Contractor be paid in the amount certified. In addition, the Architect's approval of final payment assures the Owner
that the conditions precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment as set forth in this Section have been fulfilled.
After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall approve or disapprove same within ten days after it has
been delivered to the Director of the Department of Transportation and Public Works. For contracts less than $400,000, Owner shall
pay 90% of the approved estimate to the Contractor within seven days after its approval, and the remaining 10% of each such
Page 15
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.r)dffactorv.com
estimate will be retained by the Owner until the final estimate is approved and the Work is accepted by the City Council of the City of
Fort Worth. For contracts in excess of $400,000, the Owner will retain only 5% of each estimate until the final estimate is approved
and work accepted by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth.
No Certificate for a progress payment, nor any progress payment, nor any partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the
Owner, shall constitute an acceptance of any Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents, or relieve the Contractor of
liability in respect to any warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship. The Contractor shall promptly remedy any
defects in the Work and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom that shall appear within a period of one year from the
date of final acceptance of the Work unless a longer period is specified.
1-6 PAYMENTS WITHHELD . The BCM may decline to approve an Application for Payment and may withhold his Certificate
in whole or in part if in his opinion he is unable to make the representations to the Owner as provided in this Section. The Architect
may also decline to approve any Applications for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent
inspections, may nullify the whole or any part of any Certificate for Payment previously issued to such extent as may be necessary
in his opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of:
1) Defective work not remedied;
2) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims;
3) Failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors, or for labor, materials or equipment;
4) Reasonable doubt that the Work can be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;
5) Damage to another contractor;
6) Reasonable indication that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time; or
7) Unsatisfactory prosecution of the Work by the Contractor.
When such grounds for the refusal of payment are removed, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. The
Owner reserves the right to withhold the payment of any monthly estimate, without payment of interest, if the Contractor fails to
perform the Work in accordance with the specifications.
1-7 Not used
1-8 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES : The deduction for liquidated damages shall be as follows:
Amount of Contract Liquidated Damages Per Day
$15,000 or less $45
$15,001 to $25,000 $ 63
$25,001 to $50,000 $105
$50,001 to $100,000 $154
$100,000to $500,000$210
$500,001 to $1,000,000 $315
$1,000,001 to $2,000,000 $420
$2,000,001 to $5,000,000 $630
$5.000,001 to $10,000,000 $840
over $10,000,000 $980
1-9 FAILURE OF PAYMENT If, without fault on the part of the Contractor, the BCM should fail to issue any Certificate for
Payment within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, if the Contractor's Application for Payment, or
if, without fault on the part of the Contractor, the Owner should fail to approve such estimate or to pay to the Contractor 90% or 95%
(as applicable) of the amount thereof within the period of time specified, then the Contractor may, upon seven (7) days additional
written notice to the Owner and to the Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received.
1-10 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
Prior to the request for final payment, the Contractor must meet ICI provisions for Project Closeout.
When the Contractor determines that the Work is substantially complete, the Construction Manager shall inspect the project with the
Contractor and prepare a 'Preliminary Punch List".
When the Architect, on the basis of a subsequent inspection, determines that the Work is substantially complete, he then will
prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion (G704) which, when approved by the Owner, shall allow the Contractor to request a
Certificate of occupancy which will establish the Date of Substantial Completion. The Certificate of Final Completion shall state the
responsibilities of the Owner and the Contractor for maintenance, heat, utilities, and insurance, shall set forth the remaining work as
a 'final punch list'. The Contractor shall complete the remaining work listed therein within 60 calendar days. When the Certificate of
Occupancy has been issued, the retainage will be reduced to 4%.
Upon completion of the work listed on the final punch list to the satisfaction of the City of Fort Worth, the retainage may be reduced
to 2.5%.
Page 16
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 511412005
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactorv.com
Should the Contractor fail to complete all contractual requirements of the contract, including submittals and final pay request within
the fixed time, the contract time will again commence. Should the contractor fail to complete the work within the contract duration,
liquidated damages will be assessed
Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection, the City will conduct a joint inspection and certify completion
of the final punch list by cosigning it with the Contractor.
The Contractor shall submit the following items to the City prior to requesting final payment:
1) Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims (G706) stating that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and
other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or his property might in any way be responsible, have been
paid or otherwise satisfied,
2) Consent of Surety to Final Payment (G707), if any, to final payment,
3) Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens (G706A), and,
4) Other data establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obligations, such as receipts, releases, and waivers of liens arising
out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner.
5) Contractor's Warranty
6) Statement that ail outstanding work has been completed
7) Issuance of the Final Certificate of Substantial Completion
8) Final acceptance by the City of Fort Worth.
If any Subcontractor, materialman or laborer refuses to furnish a Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens, the Contractor may, at
the election of the Owner, furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify him against any right, claim or lien which might be
asserted by such Subcontractor, materialman or laborer. If any such right, claim or lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are
made. The Contractor shall refund to the Owner all monies that the latter may be compelled to pay to discharging such right, claim
or lien, including all costs and reasonable attorney's fees.
The Contractor may then request final payment. The acceptance of final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the
Contractor except those previously made in writing and still unsettled.
The Contractors one-year warranty will commence upon final acceptance of the Project by the City of Fort Worth.
The designated representative of the City Council of the City of Fort Worth will make final acceptance and no other form of
acceptance will be binding upon the Owner. Final payment and release of the retainage amount will become due within fifteen days
following acceptance.
1-11 FINAL PAYMENT FOR UN -BONDED PROJECTS Final payment will not be made for a period of 30 calendar days and
until all requirements have been met, with the exception of Consent of Surety for Final Payment.
SECTION J
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
J-1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and
supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. The Contractor shall designate a responsible member
of his organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent
unless otherwise designated in writing by the Contractor to the Architect.
J-2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY . The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions for the safety of, and
shall provide all reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to:
(1) All employees on the Work and all other persons who may be affected thereby;
(2) All the Work and all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or -off the site, under the care,
am custody or control of the Contractor or any of his Subcontractors or Sub -contractors; and
(3) Other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and
utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction.
Until acceptance of the Work, it shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every precaution against
injury or damage to the Work by the action of the elements or from any other cause whatsoever, whether arising from the execution
or from the non -execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore and make good, at his own expense, all injuries
or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any of the above, caused before its completion and acceptance.
The Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws, Ordinances, Rules, Regulations and Orders of any public authority having
jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury or loss. He shall erect and maintain, as
required by existing conditions and progress of the Work, all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting
danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent
utilities.
Page 17
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.r)dffactorv.com
When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment is necessary for the execution of the Work, the
Contractor shall exercise the utmost care and shall carry on such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel.
All damage or loss to any property referred to in the preceding paragraphs caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, any
Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable,
shall be remedied by the Contractor, including damage or loss attributable to faulty Drawings or Specifications and acts or omissions
of the Architect or anyone employed by him or for whose acts he may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the
Contractor or anyone claiming through the Contractor for such damage or loss.
The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the Work to be loaded so as to endanger its safety.
J-3 HARD HATS . Hard Hats will be required at all construction sites included in this Contract from start to completion of
work. Each Contractor, employee and visitor at any construction site included in the Contract will be required to wear a hard hat.
The Contractor shall enforce the wearing of hard hats by Contractor, employees and visitors. Contractor shall provide ten hard hats
for use by the consulting Architects and Engineers and visitors.
J-4 EMERGENCIES . In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act at his discretion .
to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Any additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on
account of emergency work shall be determined as provided in Changes in the Work.
J-5 SAFE WORK PRACTICES . The Contractor shall employ safe practices in handling materials and equipment used in
performing required work so as to insure the safety of his workmen, City employees and the public. The Contractor shall keep the
premise free at all times from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish. At the completion of the work, the Contractor shall
remove all his wastes and rubbish from and about the work area, as well as his tools, equipment and surplus materials and shall
leave the area as clean and free of spot, stains, etc., as before the work was undertaken.
J-6 TRENCH SAFETY The Contractor shall be responsible for all design and implementation of trench shoring and
stabilization to meet regulatory requirements. If the Proposal requires, the Contractor shall include a per unit cost for trench safety
measures in his bid. If not included in the Proposal, the Contractor shall include a cost for trench safety measures for all trenches
over 5 feet in depth in his Schedule of Values.
SECTION K - INSURANCE
K-1 Insurance Reauired . The Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until he has obtained all insurance
required under this Section and such insurance has been approved by the City of Fort Worth, nor shall the Contractor allow any
Subcontractor to commence work to be performed under this Contract until all similar insurance of the Subcontractor has been so
obtained and approved. The City of Fort Worth will be listed as an 'additional insured' on all policies except Worker's
Compensation.
K-2 Workers' Compensation Insurance
1) General
a) Contractor's Worker's Compensation Insurance. Contractor agrees to provide to the Owner (City) a certificate showing
that it has obtained a policy of workers compensation insurance covering each of its employees employed on the project
in compliance with state law. No Notice to Proceed will be issued until the Contractor has complied with this section.
b) Subcontractor's Worker's Compensation Insurance. Contractor agrees to require each and every subcontractor who will
perform work on the project to provide to it a certificate from such subcontractor stating that the subcontractor has a policy
of workers compensation insurance covering each employee employed on the project. Contractor will not permit any
subcontractor to perform work on the project until such certificate has been acquired. Contractor shall provide a copy of
all such certificates to the Owner (City).
c) By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the contractor is representing to
the City that all employees of the contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's
compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification
codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the
case of a self -insured, with the Texas Worker's Compensation Commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation.
Providing false or misleading information may subject the contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil
penalties or other civil actions.
d) The contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the contractor which entitles the
City to declare the contract void if the contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of
breach from the City.
2) Definitions:
a) Certificate of coverage ("certificate"). A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by
the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-
84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing
services on a project, for the duration of the project.
Page 18
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.r)dffactorv.com
b) Duration of the Project. Includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the contractors/person's
work on the project has been completed and accepted by the City.
c) Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in section 406.096)-includes all persons or entities performing
all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person
contracted directly with the contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without
limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -operators, employees of
any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project "Services" include,
without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other
services related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage
vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets.
3) Requirements
a) The contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of
any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all
employees of the contractor providing services of the project, for the duration of the project.
b) The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract
c) If the coverage period shown on the contractors current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the
contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the City showing that
coverage has been extended.
d) The contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the City:
i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on
file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and
ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of
coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project.
e) The contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter.
f) The contractor shall notify the City in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor
knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing
services on the project.
g) The contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Worker's
Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered,
and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage.
h) The contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to:
i) provide coverage, based on proper reporting on the classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any
coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its
employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project;
ii) provide to the contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that
coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the
project;
iii) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of
coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
iv) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor.
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and
(2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the
coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
v) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter.
vi) notify the City in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the person knew or should
have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the
project; and
All contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs h-i) - vii), with the
certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services.
4) Posting of Required Workers Compensation Coverage.
a) The contractor shall post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are
required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This
notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Workers Compensation Act or other Texas
Workers Compensation Commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text
in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker
population. The text for the notices shall be the following text, without any additional words or changes:
Page 19
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.r)dffactorv.com
'REQUIRED WORKER'S COMPENSATION COVERAGE
The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project
must be covered by worker's compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering
equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of
the identity of their employer or status as an employee".
Call the Texas Worker's Compensation Commission at 512440-3789 to receive information on the legal
requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an
employer's failure to provide coverage.'
K-3 LIABILITY INSURANCE . The Contractor shall procure and maintain during the term of this Contract such Liability
Insurance as shall protect him, the City of Fort Worth and any Subcontractor performing work covered by this Contract, from claims
of damage which may arise from operations under this Contract, including blasting, when blasting is done on, or in connection with
the Work of the Project, whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed
by either of them and the limits of such insurance shall be not less than the following:
1) Automobile Liability: $1,000,000 each accident, or reasonably equivalent split limits for bodily injury and property damage.
Coverage shall be on "any auto" including leased, hired, owned, non -owned and borrowed vehicles used in connection with
this Contract.
2) Commercial General Liability: $1,000,000 each occurrence. Coverage under the policy shall be as comprehensive as that
provided in a current Insurance Services Office (ISO) policy form approved for use in Texas and the policy shall have no
exclusions by endorsement unless such are approved by the City.
3) Asbestos Abatement Liability Insurance: When the Project specifically requires the removal of Asbestos Containing Materials,
the Contractor, or subcontractor performing the removal, shall be required to maintain Asbestos Abatement Liability Insurance
as follows: $1,000,000 per occurrence; $2,000,000 aggregate limit. The coverage shall include any pollution exposure,
including environmental impairment liability, associated with the services and operations performed under this contract in
addition to sudden and accidental contamination or pollution liability for gradual emissions and clean-up costs.
K-4 BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE
Unless stated otherwise in the Proposal or Invitation, the Contractor shall procure, pay for and maintain at all times during the term
of this Contract, Builder's Risk Insurance against the perils of fire, lightning, windstorm, hurricane, hail, riot, explosion, civic
commotion, smoke, aircraft, land vehicles, vandalism, and malicious mischief, at a limit equal to 100% of the Contract Sum.
The policy shall include coverage for materials and supplies while in transit and while being stored on or off site. If specifically
required in the Instructions to Bidders, the policy shall include coverage for flood and earthquake. Different sub -limits for these
coverages must be approved by the City.
Consequential damage due to faulty workmanship and/or design performed by the Contractor or his agents shall be covered
Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor shall notify the City of Fort Worth in writing before terminating this insurance.
K-5 PROOF OF CARRIAGE OF INSURANCE . The Contractor shall provide a certificate of insurance documenting the
Transportation and Public Works Department, City of Fort Worth as a "Certificate Holder", and noting the specific project(s) covered
by the Contractors insurance as documented on the certificate of insurance. More than one certificate may be required of the
Contractor depending upon the agents an/or insurers for the Contractor's insurance coverages specified for the project(s).
K-6 OTHER INSURANCE RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1) The City of Fort Worth shall be an additional insured, by endorsement, on all applicable insurance policies.
2) Applicable insurance policies shall each be endorsed with a waiver of subrogation in favor of the City of Fort Worth.
3) Insurers of policies maintained by Contractor and its subcontractor(s), if applicable, shall be authorized to do business in the
State of Texas, or otherwise approved by the City of Fort Worth, and such shall be acceptable to the City of Fort Worth insofar
as their financial strength and solvency are concerned. Any company through which the insurance is placed must have a
rating of at least A:VII, as stated in current edition of A. M. Bests Key Rating Guide. At the City's sole discretion, a less
favorable rate may be accepted by the City.
4) Deductible limits on insurance policies and/or self insured retentions exceeding $10,000 require approval of the City of Fort
Worth as respects this Contract.
5) The City of Fort Worth shall be notified in writing a minimum of thirty days prior to an insurer's action in the event of
cancellation, non -renewal or material change in coverage regarding any policy providing insurance coverage required in this
Contract.
6) Full limits of insurance shall be available for claims arising out of this Contract with the City of Fort Worth.
7) The Contractor shall provide certificates of insurance to the City prior to commencement of operations pursuant to this
Contract. Any failure on part of the City of Fort Worth to request such documentation shall not be construed as a waiver of
insurance requirements specified herein.
Page 20
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.r)dffactorv.com
8) The City of Fort Worth shall be entitled, upon request and without incurring expense, to review the insurance policies including
endorsements thereto and, at its discretion, to require proof of payment for policy premiums.
9) The City of Fort Worth shall not be responsible for paying the cost of insurance coverages required herein.
10) Notice of any actual or potential claim and/or litigation that would affect insurance coverages required herein shall be provided
to the City in a timely manner.
11) "Other insurance" as referenced in any policy of insurance providing coverages required herein shall not apply to any insurance
policy or program maintained by the City of Fort Worth.
12) Contractor shall agree to either require its subcontractors to maintain the same insurance coverages and limits thereof as
specified herein or the Contractor shall provide such coverage on the Contractor's subcontractors.
SECTION L
CHANGES IN THE WORK
L-1 CHANGE ORDER . The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order Changes in the Work within the general
scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and the Contract Time being adjusted
accordingly. All Such Changes in the Work shall be authorized by Change Order, and shall be executed under the applicable
conditions of the Contract Documents.
A Change Order is a written order to the Contractor signed by the Contractor, Owner and the Architect, issued after the execution of
the Contract, authorizing a Change in the Work or adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the
Contract Time may be changed only by Change Order.
Any changes in work required due to changed or unforeseen conditions, or by request of either the Contractor or the City, shall be
coordinated with the Director, Department of Transportation and Public Works. A change order must be written and duly negotiated
and executed prior to performing changed work.
The cost or credit to the Owner resulting from a Change in the work shall be determined in one or more of the following ways:
1) by mutual acceptance of a lump sum property itemized, including the allowance to Contractor for overhead and profit stipulated
in the original contract proposal;
2) by unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; or
3) by cost and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee.
If none of the methods set forth herein above is agreed upon, the Contractor, provided he receives a Change Order, shall promptly
proceed with the Work involved. The cost of such work shall then be determined on the basis of the Contractor's reasonable
expenditures and savings, including a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit as indicted in the original contract proposal. In
such cases, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect shall prescribe, an itemized accounting together
with appropriate supporting data. Pending final determination of cost to the Owner, payments on account shall be made on the
Architect's Certificate of Payment as approved by the Owner,
If after the contract has been executed, the Architect, requests a price proposal from the Contractor for a proposed change in scope
of the work, Contractor shall process such proposal within seven days of receipt and return the price quote to the Architect in writing.
The Architect shall review the price quotation and if approval is recommended, forward the proposed change order request and
price proposal to the Owner for approval. If the Architect will attempt to negotiate with Contractor to revise the proposal to a figure
which is fair and reasonable and forward it on to the Owner for approval. if the negotiations do not result in an equitable solution, the
Architect shall prepare a cost-plus type Change Order with a price -not -to -exceed figure for approval by the City and require specific
documentation to be provided by Contractor in accordance with the paragraph above.
Contractor is advised that according to City of Fort Worth Charter, that, the City Council must approve all Change Orders and Work
Orders which results in an increase in cost of the contract amount by over $25,000. Normal processing time for the City Staff to
obtain City Council approval, once the recommended change order has been received at the City, is approximately thirty days.
Owner, and Contractor shall endeavor to identify Change Order items as early in the Construction process as possible to minimize
their impact on the construction schedule.
If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if the quantities originally contemplated are so
changed in a proposed Change Order that application of the agreed unit prices to the quantities of Work proposed will create a
hardship on the Owner or the Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted to prevent such hardship.
If the Contractor claims that additional cost or time is involved because of (1) any written interpretation issued pursuant to Section A,
(2) any order by the Architect or Owner to stop the Work pursuant to Section B, where the Contract was not at fault, or (3) any
written order for a minor change in the Work, the Contractor shall make such claim.
L-2 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST OR TIME . If the Contractor wishes to make a claim for an increase in the Contract
Sum or an extension in the Contract Time, he shall give the Architect written notice thereof within a reasonable time after the
Page 21
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactorv.com�
occurrence of the event that gave rise to such claim. This notice shall be given by the Contractor before proceeding to execute the
Work, except in an emergency endangering life or property in which case the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with Section J.
No such claim shall be valid unless so made. Any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time resulting from such claim, if
approved by the Owner, shall be authorized by Change Order.
L-3 OVERHEAD ALLOWANCES FOR CHANGES : Should any change in the work or extra work be ordered, the following
applicable percentage shall be added to Material and Labor costs to cover overhead and profit
1. Allowance to the Contractor for overhead and profit for extra work performed by the Contractor's own forces shall not exceed
fifteen percent f 15%).
2. Allowance to the Contractor for overhead and profit for extra work performed by a Subcontractor and supervised by the
Contractor shall not exceed ten percent (I .
L-4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK . The Architect shall have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving
an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract
Documents. Such changes may be effected by Field Order or by other written order. Such changes shall be confirmed in writing by
the Architect and shall be binding on the Owner and the Contractor.
L-5 FIELD ORDERS . The Architect may issue written Field Orders which interpret the Contract Documents, or which order
minor changes in the Work without change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. The Contractor shall cant' out such Field Orders
promptly.
SECTION M
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
M-1 UNCOVERING OF WORK . If any Work should be covered contrary to the request of the Owner, it must be uncovered for
observation and replaced, at the Contractors expense.
If any other work has been covered which the Owner has not specifically requested to observe prior to being covered, the Architect
or the Owner may request to see such work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work be found in accordance with
the Plans and Specifications, the cost of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to the Owner.
If such work be found not in accordance with the Plans and Specifications, the Contractor shall pay such costs unless it be found
that this condition was caused by a separate contractor employed by the Owner.
M-2 CORRECTION OF WORK . The Contractor shall promptly correct all work rejected by the Owner as defective or as failing
to conform to the Plans and Specifications whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated,
installed or completed. The Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such rejected Work, including the cost of the Architects
additional service thereby made necessary.
If, within one year after the Date of Substantial Completion or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by
the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents, any of the work is found to be defective or not in
accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of a written notice from the Owner to
do so, unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition, describing same specifically
and not generally. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition.
All such defective or non -conforming work under the preceding paragraphs shall be removed from the site where necessary, and the
work shall be corrected to comply with the Contract Documents without cost to the Owner.
The Contractor shall bear the cost of making good all work of separate contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or
correction.
If the Contractor does not remove such defective or non -conforming work within a reasonable time fixed by written notice from the
the Owner, the Owner may remove it and may store the materials or equipment at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor
does not pay the cost of such removal and storage within ten days thereafter, the Owner may upon ten additional days' written -
notice sell such work at auction or at private sale and shall account for the net proceeds thereof, after deducting all the costs that
should have been bome by the Contractor including compensation for additional architectural services. If such proceeds of sale do
not cover all costs that the Contractor should have borne, the difference shall be charged to the Contractor and an appropriate
Change Order shall be issued. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the
Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.
If the Contractor fails to correct such defective or non -conforming work, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section G.
The obligation of the Contractor under this Section shall be in addition to and not in limitation of any obligations imposed upon him
by special guarantees required by the Contract Documents or otherwise prescribed by law.
M-3 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE OR NON -CONFORMING WORK . If the Owner prefers to accept defective or non-
conforming work, he may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case a Change Order will be issued to
reflect an appropriate reduction in the Contract Sum, or, if the amount is determined after final payment, it shall be paid by the
Contractor.
Page 22 '_
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.pdffactorv.com
SECTION N
TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT
N-1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR . If the work is stopped for a period of 30 days under an order or any court or
other public authority having jurisdiction, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or
any other persons performing any of the work under a contract with the Contractor, or if the work should be stopped for a period of
30 days by the Contractor for the Owner's failure to make payment thereon as provided in Section I, then the Contractor may after
Stu the end of such period of 30 days and upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner, terminate the Contract
N-2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER . If the contractor is adjudged as bankrupt, or if he makes a general assignment for the
benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency, of if the Contractor refuses, except in cases for
which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials, or if he fails to make prompt
payment to Subcontractors or for materials or labor, or fails to comply with al Laws, Statutes, Charter, Ordinances, Regulations or
Orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, or otherwise is guilty of a substantial violation of a provision of the Contract
Documents, then the Owner, on its own initiative that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may, without prejudice to any
rights or remedy and after giving the Contractor and his surety, if any, seven (7) days' written notice, terminate the employment of
the Contractor and take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery thereon
owned by the Contractor and may finish the work by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such case the Contractor shall
not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished.
If the costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's additional services., exceed the unpaid balance of the
Contract, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.
The City of Fort Worth may terminate this contract in whole, or from time to time, in part, whenever such termination is in the best
interest of the City. Termination will be effected by delivering to the Contractor a notice of termination specifying to what extent
performance of the work of the contract is being terminated and the effective date of termination. After receipt of termination the
contractor shall:
a) Stop work under the Contract on the date and to the extent specified on the notice of termination.
ra
b) Place no further orders or subcontracts except as may be necessary for the completion of the work not terminated.
c) Terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of the work terminated by the notice of
termination.
After termination as above, the City will pay the contractor a proportionate part of the contract price based on the work completed;
provided, however, that the amount of payment on termination shall not exceed the total contract price as reduced by the portion
thereof allocatable to the work not completed and further reduced by the amount of payments, if, any otherwise made. Contractor
shall submit its claim for amounts due after termination as provided in this paragraph within 30 days after receipt of such claim. In
the event of any dispute or controversy as to the propriety or allowability of all or any portion of such claim under this paragraph,
such dispute or controversy shall be resolved and be decided by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth, and the decision by the
City Council of the City of Fort Worth shall be final and binding upon all parties to this contract
SECTION O
.� SIGNS
The Contractor shall construct and install the project designation sign as required in the Contract Documents and in strict
accordance with the Specifications for 'Project Designation Signs.' This sign shall be a part of this Contract and shall be included in
the Contractor's Base Bid for the Project.
SECTION P
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
P-1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish, erect, and maintain facilities and perform temporary work required in the
performance of this Contract, including those shown and specified.
P-2 USE OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES . All temporary facilities shall be made available for use by all workmen and
subcontractors employed on the project, subject to reasonable directions by the Contractor as to their proper and most efficient
utilization.
P-3 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL The Contractor shall maintain temporary facilities in a proper, safe operating and
sanitary condition for the duration of the Contract. Upon completion of the Contract, all such temporary work and facilities shall be
removed from the premises and disposed of unless otherwise directed or specified hereunder.
P4 FIELD OFFICES AND SHED
The Contractor is not required to provide a temporary field office or telephone for projects under $1,000,000. Contractor shall equip
the Project Superintendent with a pager and provide 24-hour contacts to the City.
The Contractor shall provide a temporary field office building for himself, his subcontractors and use by the Architect. For
construction contracts with a bid price in excess of $1,000,000.00, the Contractor shall provide a separate field office for the City's
Page 23
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.[)dffactorv.com
field representative (but the separate office may be in the same structure). The buildings shall afford protection against the weather,
and each office shall have a lockable door, at least one window, adequate electrical outlets and lighting, and a shelf large enough to
accommodate perusal of the project drawings. Openings shall have suitable locks. Field offices shall be maintained for the full time
during the operation of the work of the Contract. During cold weather months, the field offices shall be suitably insulated and
equipped with a heating device to maintain 70 degree Fahrenheit temperature during the workday. During warm weather the offices
shall be equipped with an air conditioning device to maintain temperature below 75 degrees F. Upon completion of the work of the
Contract, the Contractor shall remove the building from the premises. in addition to the drawing shelf, provide for the City field
representatives office: one deck, four chairs, plan rack and a four drawer filing cabinet (with lock). Each office shall contain not less
than 120 square feet of floor space.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain storage sheds, other temporary buildings or trailers on the project site as required for his
use. Location of sheds and trailers shall be as approved by the Owner. Remove sheds when work is completed, or as directed.
P4 TELEPHONE . The Contractor shall provide and pay for telephone installation and service to the field offices described
above. Service shall be maintained for the duration of operations under this contract. The Contractor shall provide for and pay for an
automatic telephone -answering device at the site office for the duration of the project Contractor will install separate fax lines and
instruments for the City and the Contractor.
P-6 TOILET FACILITIES . The Contractor shall provide proper, sanitary and adequate toilet facilities for the use of all
workmen and subcontractors employed on the project.
P-7 UTILITIES . Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements and provide for temporary water and electricity required
during the construction. Contractor shall provide and install temporary utility meters during the contract construction period. These
meters will be read and the Contractor will be billed on this actual use. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials required
to tap into the utilities. The Contractor shall make the connections and extend the service lines to the construction area for use of all
trades. Upon completion of the work all utility lines shall be removed and repairs made to the existing lines. Only utilities at existing
voltages, pressures, frequencies, etc. will be available to the Contractor.
Water. Provide an ample supply of potable water for all purposes of construction at a point convenient to the project or as shown on
the Drawings. Pipe water from the source of supply to all points where water will be required. Provide sufficient hose to carry water
to every required part of the construction and allow the use of water facilities to subcontractors engaged on the work. Provide
pumps, tanks and compressors as may be required to produce required pressures.
Electric Service. Provide adequate electric service for power and lighting to all points where required. Temporary, electric service
shall be of sufficient capacity and characteristics to supply proper current for various types of construction tools, motors, welding
machines, lights, heating plant, air conditioning system, pumps, and other work required. Provide sufficient number of electric outlets
so that 50 foot long extension cords will reach all work requiring light or power.
Lighting. Supply and maintain temporary lighting so that work of all trades may be properly and safely performed, in such areas and
at such time that day -lighting is inadequate. Provide at least 0.75 wafts of incandescent lighting per squgr4e foot and maintain a
socket voltage of at least 110 volts. Use at least 100 waft lamps. In any event, the lighting intensity shall not be less than 5 foot
candles in the vicinity of work and traffic areas.
P 6 HEATING ,. Heating devices required under this paragraph shall not be electric. The Contractor shall provide heat,
ventilation, fuel and services as required to protect all work and materials and to keep the humidity down to the extent required to
prevent corrosion of any metal and to prevent dampness or mildew which is potentially damaging to materials and finishes. All such
heating, ventilation and services shall be provided and maintained until final acceptance of all work. In addition, the Contractor shall
provide heat ventilation prior and during the following work operations as follows:
a) At all times during the placing, setting and curing of concrete provide sufficient heat to insure the heating of the spaces
involved to not less than 40 F.
b) From the beginning of the application of drywall and during the setting and curing period, provide sufficient heat to produce a
temperature in the spaces involved of not less than 55 F.
c) For a period of seven (7) days previous to the placing of interior finish materials and throughout the placing of finish painting,
decorating and laying of resilient flooring materials, provide sufficient heat to produce a temperature of not less than 60 F.
P-9 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION. EQUIPMENT AND PROTECTION
The Contractor shall provide, maintain, and remove upon completion of the work all temporary rigging, scaffolding, hoisting
equipment, rubbish chutes, ladders to roof, barricades around openings, and all other temporary work as required to complete all
work of the Contract. Contractor shall coordinate the use and furnishing of scaffolds with his sub -contractors.
The Contractor shall provide, maintain, and remove upon completion of the work, or sooner, if authorized by the Owner, all fences,
barricades, lights, shoring, pedestrian walkways, temporary fire escapes, and other protective structures or devices necessary for
the safety of workmen, City employees, equipment, the public and property.
All temporary construction and equipment shall conform to all regulations, ordinances, laws and other requirements of the �.
authorities having jurisdiction, including insurance companies, with regards to safety precautions, operation and fire hazard.
Page 24
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.r)dffactorv.com
The Contractor shall provide and maintain pumping facilities, including power, for keeping the site, all times, whether from
underground seepage, rainfall, drainage of broken lines.
mm The Contractor shall maintain provision for dosing and locking the building at such time as possible to do so. If this is not feasible,
maintain a night
The Contractor shall provide and maintain all barricades or enclosures, required to protect the work in progress from outside
elements, dusts, and other disturbances as a result of work under this Contract. Such protection shall be positive, shall meet the
approval of the Owner and shall be maintained for the duration of the construction period or as required to provide for the protection
as specified.
P-10 PROJECT BULLETIN BOARD The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain during the life of the project a weather -
tight bulletin board approximately 3 feet high by 5 feet wide having not less than two hinged or sliding glass doors with provisions for
locking. The bulletin board shall be mounted where and as approved by the Owner, in a prominent place accessible to employees of
the Contractor and sub -contractors, and to applicants for employment. The bulletin board shall remain the property of the Contractor
and shall be removed by him upon completion of the Contract work. The following information which will be furnished by the City to
the Contractor, shall be posted on the bulletin board and shall be maintained by the Contractor in easily readable condition at all
times for the duration of the Contract.
a. The Equal Opportunity Poster and Notice Nondiscrimination of Employment (Standard Form 38).
b. Wage Rate Information Poster (Form SOL 155), with the Contract Schedule of minimum wage rates as required by the
Davis -Bacon Act.
c. Safety Posters.
SECTION Q
VENUE
Should any action arise out of the terms and conditions of this contract, venue for said action shall lie in Tarrant County, Texas.
Page 25
General Conditions for Facility Construction Lump Sum Contract, City of Fort Worth 5/14/2005
PDF created with pdfFactory Pro trial version www.r)dffactorv.com
WILL ROGERS MEMORIAL
CENTER
PROJECT MANUAL
For
HVAC SYSTEMS MODIFICATIONS
(MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, AND PLUMBING)
FORT WORTH, TEXAS
Prepared By:
//ASUMMIT
CONSULTANTS, INC.
Summit Consultants, Inc.
1300 Summit Avenue, Suite 420
Fort Worth, Texas 76102
July 28, 2005
Summit Consultants Inc.
1300 Summit Ave. Suite 420
Fort Worth, TX 76102
Office: (817) 978-4242
Fay (817) V"240
,A SUMMIT
CONSULTANTS, INC.
August 22, 2005
Subject: Will Rogers Memorial Coliseum
HVAC System Modifications Bid Documents - Dated 07/28/05
Atta.: All Contractors
Re: Engineer's Response to Contractor RFI's
1. With regards to general note No. 2 on drawing M2.3, M2.4, M2.5 and general note No. 4
on drawing M3.1, M3.2 regarding the removal of acoustic liner from existing return air
ductwork. To what distance from AHU-3 & AHU-4 is it to be removed? To what degree
of cleanliness is to be accomplished? Is a hazardous material abatement contractor to be
used? Please define scope of work and advise.
ENGINEERSRESPONSE: Contractor is to remove all duct liner in the return dud from
the unit to the sidewall grille in the arena.
Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:
L Clean metal dud systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract
contaminants from within dud systems and remove contaminants from
building.
2 Use vacuum -collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning.
Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being
cleaned are under negative pressure.
3 Use mechanical agitation to dislodge existing return air duct liner and debris
adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts or
duct accessories
Cleanliness Verification:
4. Vsualiy inspect metal duds for contaminants
5. Where contaminants are discovered, re -clean and reinspect ducts.
New Insulation Installation
6. Install new dud wrap insulation on existing return air ductwork per division
IS dud insulation specification and addendum #3
Use service openings, as required for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection.
Create other openings to comply with dud standards
Disconnectflexible duds as needed for cleaning and inspection.
Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process if required
Summit Consultants Inc.
1300 Summit Ave. Suite 420
Fort Worth, TX 76102
Vice: (817) 878-4242
Fas (917) 87&4240
A need for a hazardous material abatement contractor will be evaluated after the bids, along
with a separate change order as needed The bid shall include a testing for asbestos
materials in the area of work.
It is acceptable to simply replace existing return air ductwork with new internally lined
ductwork to match existing.
2. Contractor asking if new roof curbs are to be provided for the new roof ventilators
serving the air handlers on the west side of the arena.
ENGINEERS RESPONSE: Gravity ventilators specified in MO. 1(2 total) were sized based
off of existing ventilator dimensions. Roof curbs will not need to be provided Contractor to
verify dimensions prior to ordering
3. Contractor asking for an events schedule. Is there anybody we need to notify to visit the
site again prior to the bid submittal date?
ENGINEERSRESPONSE. The two big dates of open work are Dec 1.76 through Jan.
and Feb. 76 through 20`"'. Every other time of construction will have to be highly
coordinated with the Will Rogers schedule (get schedule from Chris Harmon if needed). As
mentioned in the meeting, it is possible to work during events as long as there is no noise
or visual "eyesores" detected by the public or the staff.
If another visit to the site is required before submission of bids, please contact Chris
Harmon with WRMC (817) 392-5988 jor an appointment.
Sincerely,
SUMMIT CONSULTANTS, INC.
AM apz-- a�p
WEII OSG�?I� RY
FT. VOW, fix.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15081 DUCT INSULATION
15083 PIPE INSULATION
15110 VALVES
15122 METERS AND GAUGES
15172 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
15181 HYDRONIC PIPING
15185 HYDRONIC PUMPS
15763 HYDRONIC AIR HANDLERS
15900 DDC CONTROLS SYSTEMS
15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM - HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM - HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
SECTION 15050 — BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Not all listed materials and systems may be utilized for this project. Use applicable items, as
required
B. This Section includes the following:
1.
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2.
Transition fittings.
3.
Dielectric fittings.
4.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
5.
Sleeves.
6.
Escutcheons.
7.
Grout.
8.
Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
9.
Painting and finishing.
10.
Concrete bases.
11.
Supports and anchorages.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15050-1
SECTION 15050 — BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
3. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. GENERAL MECHANICAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
1. In addition to submittal procedures indicated in other sections of this specification, all
Division 15 items shall be submitted as one complete set, tabbed and indexed with all
equipment and systems properly and clearly identified per project document designations
(partial submittals will not be accepted without the written permission of the Engineer).
All capacities, standard accessories, options and characteristics shall be clearly and
individually identified. Any deviations from the specified systems and equipment shall
be clearly identified and accompanied by descriptions, explanations, drawings and
calculations, etc. to support their use, indicating specifically how the submitted items will
meet requirements of the original design specifications. The Engineer shall have sole
discretion, without recourse, as to the determination of what items are deemed suitable
for approval. Alternative submittals/substitutions: If re -design of the building and/or
systems is required to accommodate the proposed alternative equipment/systems, such re-
design shall be performed by the A/E of record, and paid for (on an hourly basis, plus
expenses) by the contractor requesting the substitution. Submittals not meeting these
reauirements are subiect to return without notice or review.
B. Product Data: For the following:
1. Transition fittings.
2. Dielectric fittings.
3. Mechanical sleeve seals.
4. Escutcheons.
C. Welding certificates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE,,
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS 131.1, "Structural
Welding Code --Steel."
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15050-2
SECTION 15050 — BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
C. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical
characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and
connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If
minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with
requirements.
D. MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTROLS SHALL BE FURNISHED WITH ALL
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS, UNLESS OTHERWISE APPROVED.
EXCEPTION: STARTERS THAT ARE TO BE FURNISHED AS PART OF A MOTOR
CONTROL CENTER (MCC) SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH, AND FURNISHED BY
ELECTRICAL.
E. ALL CONTROL WIRING SHALL BE INSTALLED IN EMT CONDUIT (OR OTHER
APPROVED RACEWAY) AS PER DIVISION 16, AND NEC REQUIREMENTS, UNLESS
OTHERWISE APPROVED. EXCEPTION: PROPERLY RATED CABLE (CEILING
PLENUM, ETC.) MAY BE INSTALLED IN ACCESSIBLE, CONCEALED SPACES, AS
DIRECTED IN OTHER SECTIONS OF THIS SPECIFICATION.
F. Work shall be performed in accordance with quality, commercial practices. The appearance of
finished work shall be of equal importance with its operation. Materials and equipment shall be
installed based upon the actual dimensions and conditions at the project site. Locations for
materials or equipment requiring an exact fit shall be field measured. Rotating equipment,
piping and duct system shall be isolated to avoid unacceptable noise levels from objectionable
vibrations from all systems without cost to the Owner.
G. Some mechanical equipment sizes indicated on the Drawings are based on a particular
manufacturer. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to verify that the equipment he proposes
to furnish will fit in the space indicated on the Drawings. Refer to Architectural and Structural
Drawings for building dimensions. Equipment furnished by the Owner shall be coordinated
with equipment furnished and installed under this section and other sections.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory -applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in -place
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that
are concealed behind finished surfaces.
r�IT
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS �4411 G 45q�g
SECTION 15050 — BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
D. Where the mechanical drawings indicate (diagrammatically or otherwise) the work intended and
the functions to be performed, even though some minor details are not shown, the Contractor
shall furnish all equipment, material (other than Owner furnished items), and labor to complete
the installation, and accomplish all indicated functions of the mechanical installation. Further,
the Contractor shall be responsible for taking the necessary actions to ensure that all mechanical
work is coordinated and compatible with architectural, plumbing, electrical and structural plans.
In the event of conflict between the plans and the enforcing code authority, the latter shall rule.
Any modification resulting there from shall be made without additional cost to the Owner or
Engineer. The contractor shall report such modifications to the Architect in writing and secure
approval before proceeding. Where a conflict between the construction drawings and
specifications occur the greater quantity and/or greater quality shall be used.
E. Maintain "As -Built" Drawing to be included with the O & M Manuals. Maintain a set of "Blue -
Line Prints and indicate changes and diagrams of those portions of work in which actual
construction is significantly at variance with the Contract Drawings. Mark the Drawings with a
colored pencil. Prepare, as the work progresses and upon completion of work, drawings clearly
indicating locations of all devices, equipment and other pertinent items, as installed. Include -
invert elevation or buried depth of piping. Upon completion of the project, submit all materials
to the Owner, after verifying all the above data is shown correctly.
F. Perform work to meet or exceed the requirements of the International Building Code,
International Mechanical Code, and other applicable statutes, ordinances, codes and regulations
of governmental authorities having jurisdiction. Resolve any code violation discovered in the
Contract Documents with the Engineer prior to award of the Contract. After award of the
Contract, make any corrections or additions necessary for compliance with applicable codes at
no additional cost to the Owner.
G. Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses and inspections as required by law for the completion of
the work. Comply with the requirements of the applicable utility companies serving this
project. Make all arrangements with the utility companies for proper coordination of the work.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers «—
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS on
A. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1 for factory -threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
4
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15050-4
SECTION 15050 — BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe -Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B 16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast -bronze flanges.
b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full -face
or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B 18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe -Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper -phosphorus alloys for general -duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAgl, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
unless otherwise indicated.
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with
ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div.
C. JCM Industries.
2. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.
3. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve -type coupling.
4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.
B. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173
with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion -resistant metal
band on each end.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15050-5
SECTION 15050 — BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
1. Manufacturers:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
b. Fernco, Inc.
C. Mission Rubber Company.
2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder -
joint plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory -fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working
pressure at 180 deg F.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
C. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory -fabricated, companion -flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Epco Sales, Inc.
C. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
E. Dielectric -Flange Kits: Companion -flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-
face- or ring -type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic
washers, and steel backing washers.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
C. Central Plastics Company.
2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corp.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15050-6
SECTION 15050 — BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Perfection Corp.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
C. Victaulic Co. of America.
2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
C. Metraflex Co.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type
and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to
sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.7 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
2.8 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening. Where possible one piece escutcheons shall be used.
B. One -Piece, Deep -Pattern Type: Deep -drawn, box -shaped brass with polished chrome -plated
finish.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM -- HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS CIN' l"MM
. W. .
SECTION 15050 — BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
C. One -Piece, Cast -Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome -plated.
D. Split -Casting, Cast -Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome -plated.
E. One -Piece, Stamped -Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome -plated finish.
F. Split -Plate, Stamped -Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome -
plated finish.
G. One -Piece, Floor -Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate. "
H. Split -Casting, Floor -Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.9 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic -cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post -hardening, volume -adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.10 DRAIN PANS
A. Description: Aluminum or stainless steel formed or welded construction, sized to
accommodate the equipment the pan is intended to protect. All equipment (i.e. water heaters,
air handlers, pumps, etc.) that are required by code or as indicated on the construction
documents shall be provided with a drain pan with the associated copper drain pipe routed to a
code compliant receptor.
a
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved prior to installation.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15050-8
SECTION 15050 — BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel, and lighting
fixture removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep -pattern type.
b. Chrome -Plated Piping: One-piece, cast -brass type with polished chrome -plated
finish.
C. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped -steel type with spring clips.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast -
brass type with polished chrome -plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped -steel
type or split -plate, stamped -steel type with concealed hinge and set screw.
f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped -steel type with
concealed hinge and set screw or spring clips.
g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped -steel type with set screw
or spring clips.
h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor -plate
type.
M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof
.. slabs.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings
below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15050-9
SECTION 15050 — BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum -board
partitions.
C. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to
extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Installation shall comply with
roofing system warranty requirements.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
N. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve
for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
O. Underground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular
clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
P. Fire -Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.
Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in.
3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15050-10
SECTION 15050 — BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper -phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B 1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS 1310.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
Plastic Piping Solvent -Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe -handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other -than -schedule -number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138
Appendix.
J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L. PE Piping Heat -Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
I. Plain -End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2. Plain -End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to
pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS
ft WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15050-11
SECTION 15050 — BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
E. Install drain pans under equipment in such a manner that there is sufficient fall for the water to
drain if an overflow/leak condition occurs. The contractor is responsible for coordinating the
size and equipment installation for a drain pan and piping system that meets code and
functionality requirements.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Damage and Touchup: Repair maned and damaged factory -painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, where "bright" ductwork, or other piping, etc. systems are visible to "
the occupied space through grilles, etc., they shall be painted with "flat' black paint, as
required.
3.6 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's
written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both �.
directions than supported unit.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15050-12 P„
M
SECTION 15050 — BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
3. Install epoxy -coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive -strength concrete and reinforcement.
3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.8 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor
mechanical materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.9 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
***END OF SECTION***
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS ��d �S#r4■%'=
ywakfl l .
SECTION 15060 — HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
go
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment.
B. Not all listed devices may be utilized for this project. Use applicable units, as required.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
C. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment, to meet applicable
code requirements.
D. Design and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction for seismic restraint hangers
and supports for piping and equipment, where required by code.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal -
hanger shield insert indicated.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
s WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15060-1 i.
SECTION 15060 — HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Pipe Hangers:
a. B-Line Systems, Inc.
b. Grinnell Corp.
C. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
2. Channel Support Systems:
a.
B-Line Systems, Inc.
b.
Grinnell Corp.; Power -Strut Unit.
C.
Unistrut Corp.
3. Thermal -Hanger Shield Inserts:
a.
Pipe Shields, Inc.
b.
Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.
C.
Value Engineered Products, Inc.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: Refer to "Hanger and Support Applications" Article
in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and support types.
1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field -applied
finish.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are
in direct contact with copper tubing.
B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory -fabricated components for field assembly.
1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are
in direct contact with copper tubing.
C. Thermal -Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi minimum compressive -strength insulation, encased in
sheet metal shield.
1. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water -repellent -treated,
ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier.
2. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water -repellent -treated,
�. ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate.
3. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe.
4. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15060-2
SECTION 15060 — HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
5. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below
ambient air temperature.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Mechanical -Anchor Fasteners: Insert -type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized. r.
C. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory -mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry,
hydraulic -cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior
and exterior applications.
2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
3. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Specification Sections.
B. Horizontal -Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
as
1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Yoke -Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes,
NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy -Steel, Double -Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to -
NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.
5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off -
center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
6. Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid -Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
7. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
9. Adjustable Swivel -Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.
10. Split Pipe -Ring with or without Turnbuckle -Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For
suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15060-3 01
SECTION 15060 — HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
11.
Extension Hinged or Two -Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
12.
U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
_
13.
Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel
pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
14.
Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with
steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
15.
Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion -type support for pipes,
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion
support and cast-iron floor flange.
16.
Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS I to NPS 30, from two
rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
17.
Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur.
18.
Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
19.
Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if
small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
20.
Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to
NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition
to expansion and contraction.
21.
Roof application: For support of pipes, NPS % to NPS 8, where installation is above a
flat roofing system. Supports shall be installed to comply with the roof warranty.
Supports shall be roller type with vertical adjustment. Roller shall be coated steel or hard
plastic and shall be selected based on the manufacturer's data for pipe size and weight.
C. Vertical -Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20.
2. Carbon- or Alloy -Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
D. Hanger -Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable -Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of
building attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
E. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15060-4
SECTION 15060 — HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top -Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar joist P%
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side -Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4. Center -Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. ^"
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. „R
7. Top -Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to
flange edge.
8. Side -Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I -beams.
9. Steel -Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I -
beams for heavy loads.
10. Linked -Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I -
beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
12. Welded -Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
C. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
13. Side -Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where head room is limited.
F. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe -Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent
crushing insulation.
3. Thermal -Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of high -
density, 100-psi minimum compressive -strength, water -repellent -treated calcium silicate
or cellular -glass pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier
and encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield.
G. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint -Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed
1-1/4 inches.
3. Spring -Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with
springs.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15060-5
SECTION 15060 —HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable -Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
6. Variable -Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
base support.
7. Variable -Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress
from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include
auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load -adjustment capability. These
supports include the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
C. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical -type supports and one trapeze member.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure.
B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field -assembled channel systems.
Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Heavy -Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal
piping and support together on field -fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual
pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.
D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space
attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion
joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed;
fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
E. Install mechanical -anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15060-6
SECTION 15060 — HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
I. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, 'Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.
J. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal -hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
C. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal -hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight -
distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
am
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields _
shall span arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal -hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight -
distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
C. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.
6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal -Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural -steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support _.
equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15060-7 _.
No
SECTION 15060 — HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
3.4 METAL FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment
supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field -weld connections that cannot be
shop -welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Dl.l procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours
of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touching Up: Clean and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing -repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
***END OF SECTION***
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM -- HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15060-8
SECTION 15075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:
1. Equipment nameplates.
2. Equipment signs.
3. Access panel and door markers.
4. Pipe markers.
5. Valve tags.
6. Valve schedules.
7. Warning tags.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Valve numbering scheme.
C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted copies)
to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping
Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification
devices for piping.
it
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of ..
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15075-1
SECTION 15075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
am A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment on
equipment.
1. Data:
a. Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number.
b. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data.
C. Labels of tested compliances.
2. Location: Accessible and visible.
3. Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment.
B. Equipment Markers: Engraved, color -coded laminated plastic. Include contact -type, permanent
adhesive.
Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.
2. Data:
as
a. Name and plan number.
b. Equipment service.
C. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions,
and speed.
3. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for
equipment.
C. Equipment Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper -base, phenolic -resin -laminate
engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore,
unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for
mechanical fastening.
1. Data: Instructions for operation of equipment and for safety procedures.
2. Engraving: Manufacturers standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match
equipment identification.
3. Thickness: 1/16 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Thickness: 1/16 inch for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8 inches in length, and 1/8 inch for
larger units.
5. Fasteners: Self -tapping, stainless -steel screws or contact -type, permanent adhesive.
D. Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch- thick, engraved laminated plastic, with abbreviated
terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8-inch center hole for attachment.
1. Fasteners: Self -tapping, stainless -steel screws or contact -type, permanent adhesive.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15075-2
SECTION 15075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
Em
2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color -coded, with lettering indicating service,
and showing direction of flow.
1. Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated. s
2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full -band pipe markers
extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.
3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full -band or strip -type
pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label.
4. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or
as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Markers: Precoiled semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive.
C. Shaped Pipe Markers: Preformed semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vapor
barrier.
D. Self -Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure -sensitive, permanent -type, self-adhesive
back.
E. Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils thick with pressure -sensitive,
permanent -type, self-adhesive back.
1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: 3/4 inch
minimum.
2. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1-1/2
inches minimum.
2.3 DUCT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Duct Markers: Engraved, color -coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantity of
airflow and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust). Include contact -type, permanent
adhesive.
2.4 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-
inch numbers, with numbering scheme. Provide 5/32-inch hole for fastener.
I. Material: 0.032-inch- thick brass.
2. Material: 0.0375-inch- thick stainless steel.
3. Material: 3/32-inch- thick laminated plastic with 2 black surfaces and white inner layer.
4. Valve -Tag Fasteners: Brass wire -link chain.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15075-3
SECTION 15075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
2.5 VALVE SCHEDULES
A. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on standard -size bond paper. Tabulate valve
number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or
space), normal -operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for
identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve -Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry
walls for each page of valve schedule. Include mounting screws.
2. Frame: Extruded aluminum.
3. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing Quality B, 2.5-mm, single -thickness
glass.
2.6 WARNING TAGS
A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident -prevention tags; of plasticized card
stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum.
2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.
3. Nomenclature: Large -size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT
OPERATE.
4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than
single -type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's
option.
3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical
equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where not
easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include nameplates for the
following general categories of equipment:
1. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor -driven units.
2. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar
equipment.
3. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
B. Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major item of
mechanical equipment. Locate signs where accessible and visible.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS��'vl�
SECTION 15075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
Identify mechanical equipment with equipment markers in the following color codes:
a. Green: For cooling equipment and components.
b. Yellow: For heating equipment and components.
C. Green and Yellow: For combination cooling and heating equipment and
components.
2. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering
for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three -fourths the
size of principal lettering.
3. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate
safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify
units.
4. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment:
a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units
such as gas outlets.
b. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor -driven units.
C. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and
similar equipment.
d. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
C. Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels.
3.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow
indication arrows showing direction of flow.
1. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Pretensioned pipe markers.
Use size to ensure a tight fit.
2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Self-adhesive pipe markers.
Use color -coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, 1-1/2 inches wide, lapped at least 1-1/2
inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.
3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Shaped pipe markers. Use
size to match pipe and secure with fasteners.
4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Self-adhesive pipe markers.
Use color -coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches wide, lapped at least 3
inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.
B. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine
rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior
nonconcealed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15075-5
d
i
a
SECTION 15075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
da 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced markers.
3.4 VALVE -TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within
factory -fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves; faucets;
convenience and lawn -watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar
roughing -in connections of end -use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
3.5 VALVE -SCHEDULE INSTALLATION
A. Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in each major equipment room.
3.6 WARNING -TAG INSTALLATION
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where
required.
3.7 ADJUSTING
�- A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by
other work.
0
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices.
END OF SECTION 15075
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15075-6
SECTION 15081 —DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division i Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes semi -rigid, flexible duct, and plenum insulation; field -applied jackets;
accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
B. All ductwork insulation installations shall comply with the 2000 or 2003 (whichever is
applicable for the project location) International Energy Conservation Code (including all local
amendments), and other applicable codes and ordinances.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field
applied, if any), for each type of product indicated. Indicate code compliances.
B. Shop Drawings Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Removable insulation sections at access panels.
2. Application of field -applied jackets.
3. Applications at linkages for control devices.
C. Samples (where requested by Engineer): For each type of insulation and field -applied jacket.
Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Submit 12-inch-square sections of
each sample material. -
1. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each type of
field -applied finish material indicated.,
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates
of tests.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with
requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15081-1
SECTION 15081 — DUCT INSULATION
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship
program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those
specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and
sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame -spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke -developed
rating of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame -spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke -developed
rating of 150 or less.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may begin on
segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Mineral -Fiber Insulation:
a. Johns -Manville.
b. Approved equal
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Fibrous Glass Flexible Liner Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Comply with ASTM C 1071, Type I, ASTM G-21 and G-22 with factory applied edge
finish and air velocity rating of 5000 fpm. At 1" thickness the liner shall have an installed R
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15081-2
SECTION 15081— DUCT INSULATION
value of 4.0, at 1-1/2" the R value shall be 6.0, at 2" the R value shall be 8.0. Insulation shall
have a noise reduction coefficient of .70 minimum when tested in accordance with ASTM
C423. Material shall be Johns -Manville, Permacote Linacoustic Standard or equal.
B. Fibrous Glass Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553-92, Type II, without facing and with all -service jacket manufactured
from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film. At 1-1/2" thickness the liner
shall have an installed R value of 4.5, at 2" the R value shall be 6.0. Material shall be Johns -
Manville, Microlite, Type 100 or approved equal.
C. Fibrous Glass Rigid Plenum Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Comply with ASTM C 1071, Type II, ASTM G-21 and G-22 with factory applied edge
finish and air velocity rating of 5000 fpm. At 1-1/2" thickness the liner shall have an installed
R value of 6.0, at 2" the R value shall be 8.4. Material shall be Johns -Manville, Permacote _
Linacoustic R-300 or equal.
2.3 FIELD -APPLIED JACKETS
A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Aluminum Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets manufactured from aluminum alloy complying with
ASTM B 209, and having an integrally bonded moisture barrier over entire surface in contact
with insulation. Metal thickness and corrugation dimensions are scheduled at the end of this
Section.
1. Finish: Smooth finish.
2. Moisture Barrier: 1-mil- thick, heat -bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape.
Woven glass -fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..
1. Tape Width: 4 inches.
B. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick.
C. Wire: 0.080-inch, nickel -copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft -annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch,
soft -annealed, galvanized steel.
D. Weld -Attached Anchor Pins and Washers: Copper -coated steel pin for capacitor -discharge
welding and galvanized speed washer. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.
1. Welded Pin Holding Capacity: 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the attached _.
surface.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM —HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15081-3
SECTION 15081 — DUCT INSULATION
E. Adhesive -Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer
manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for
insulation thickness indicated.
1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface
temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of 100
lb for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.
F. Self -Adhesive Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer
manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for
insulation thickness indicated.
2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
4 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
.� 3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of
ducts and fittings.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each duct system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15081-4
SECTION 15081 — DUCT INSULATION
mm
E. Seal joints and seams with vapor -retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor -retarder
integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor -retarder mastic. Apply insulation
continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal
ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor
retarder.
L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
I. Pull jacket tight and smooth.
2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
3. Vapor -Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and
joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing
insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Install vapor -retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders.
1. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor -
retarder mastic. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with mastic to maintain vapor -
retarder seal.
2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with
outward clinching staples and pressure -sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
O. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor -retarder mastic.
2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3. Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor -retarder mastic.
P. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
partitions, except fire -rated walls and partitions.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15081-5
SECTION 15081— DUCT INSULATION
Q. Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper sleeves
for fire -rated wall and partition penetrations.
3.4 FIBROUS GLASS INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and
anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square
.� foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides
of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal centerline
of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and
clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
C. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
4. Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers.
5. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
6. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2
inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent
insulation segment with 1/2-inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover with pressure -sensitive
tape having same facing as insulation.
7. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.
Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
8. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment
for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually
mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
s 9. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface
with 6-inch- wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating
sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
10. Apply vapor -retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated
to receive vapor retarder.
B. Flexible Liner and Rigid Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure flexible liner insulation
with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square
foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Space anchor pins as follows:
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15081-6
SECTION 15081— DUCT INSULATION
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal centerline
of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips
to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
C. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
4. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
S. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2
inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent
insulation segment with 1/2-inch staples, 1-inch o.c., and cover with pressure -sensitive
tape having same facing as insulation.
6. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment
for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and
inside radius of elbows. Apply insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with
individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface
with 6-inch- wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating
sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
8. Apply vapor -retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated
to receive vapor retarder.
3.5 FIELD -APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION
A. Apply aluminum jacket, where duct insulation may be damaged (i.e. floor penetrations, etc.) or
where the ductwork is exposed outdoors.
1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.
2. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.
3.6 FINISHES
A. Color: Paint exposed ductwork per master color chart described in another specification.
3.7 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Round, supply -air ducts
1. Material: Fibrous glass blanket
2. Thickness: 1-1/2 inch.
3. Number of Layers: One.
4. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
B. Service: Rectangular, supply -air ducts.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM -- HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15081-7 „�
SECTION 15081 —DUCT INSULATION
1.
Material: Fibrous glass flexible liner.
2.
Thickness: 1-1/2 inch.
3.
Number of Layers: One
4.
Vapor Retarder Required: No.
C. Service: Rectangular, return -air ducts
1.
Material: Fibrous glass blanket.
2.
Thickness: 1 inch.
3.
Number of Layers: One.
4.
Vapor Retarder Required: No.
D. Service: Rectangular, outside -air ducts, in building.
1. Material: Fibrous glass blanket.
2. Thickness: 2 inch.
3. Number of Layers: One.
4. Vapor Retarder Required: No.
s
***END OF SECTION***
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
1508I.�
�►"IiGi't� ���
SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION
r-
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A- Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-
tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements; field -
applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds. Paint per other Sections
of these specifications. Not all listed systems may be utilized for this project. Use applicable
systems, as required.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field ap-
plied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
0
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type of in-
sulation and hanger.
2. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation.
3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of
insulation.
5. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
6. Application of field -applied jackets.
C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having juris-
diction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials,
sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those speci-
fied in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and ce-
ment material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame -spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke -developed rat-
ing of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame -spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke -developed
rating of 150 or less.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15083-1,.
i
SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified.
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of steam or electric heat tracing.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after installing
and testing heat -trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping that have
satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol-
lowing:
1. Molded Mineral -Fiber Insulation:
a. Johns -Manville Insulation, Inc.
b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
C. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
2. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Rubatex Corp.
C. Approved equal
,. 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Molded Mineral -Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying
with the following:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory -applied, all-
purpose, vapor -retarder jacket.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15083-2
a
SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION
2. Fire -Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and
grades:
a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass -fiber insulation,
for sealing edges of glass -fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging cloth to unfaced
glass -fiber insulation.
b. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass -fiber insulation to metal surfaces. A`
3. Vapor -Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor -retarder mastic for indoor ap-
plications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
4. Mineral -Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195.
5. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 196.
6. Mineral -Fiber, Hydraulic -Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449/C 449M.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed -cell, sponge- or expanded -rubber materials.
Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. .-
1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
2. Ultraviolet -Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions
used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.
2.3 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. `"
Woven glass -fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..
1. Tape Width: 4 inches.
B. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick.
C. Wire: 0.062-inch, soft -annealed, stainless steel.
2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM -- HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15083-3
M
SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will ad-
versely affect insulation application.
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written in-
structions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of pip-
ing, including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses re-
quired for each piping system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accesso-
ries that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.
E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Seal joints and seams with vapor -retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor re-
tarder.
H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with ad-
hesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor -
retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying insula-
tion over fittings, valves, and specialties.
L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor -retarder mastic.
1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on an-
chor legs at least 12 inches from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation ends.
Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufac-
turer to maintain vapor retarder.
3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to in-
sulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation mate-
rial manufacturer.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15083-4
SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger, support, and
shield.
M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, taper
insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.
O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.
2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip and spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor retarder.
4. Vapor -Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and
joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with
vapor -retarder mastic.
P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor -retarder mastic.
2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top
of roof flashing.
4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor -retarder mastic.
Q. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
floors.'
R. Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through penetrations
of fire -rated walls and partitions per UL requirements for the construction of the partition/wall.
3.4 MOLDED MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without
deforming insulation materials.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15083-5
SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION
2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor -
retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 15 to 20 feet to
form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments.
3. For insulation with factory -applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6
inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory -applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal
tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer and seal with vapor -retarder mastic.
an B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral -fiber blanket insulation.
4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer`s recommended adhesive, overlapping
seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with vapor -retarder mastic.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe in-
sulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered sections
of pipe insulation, or glass -fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe
insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
3. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers.
D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe in-
sulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass -fiber blanket insula-
tion to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve op-
eration without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to
stainer basket without disturbing insulation.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fit-
ting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and
vapor -retarder mastic.
5. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with canvas
jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.
2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Ce-
ment to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15083-6
SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of the same thickness
as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface. �.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1. Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe insulation and
attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to
permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For
check valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access to
strainer basket.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recom-
mended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air
to the pipe surface.
3.6 FIELD -APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION
A. Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints.
Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
B. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints.
Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant
recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless -steel bands 12 inches
o.c. and at end joints.
3.7 FINISHES
A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of the
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
B. Color: Final color shall comply with the master color chart as specified in another section. ..,
3.8 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM - HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15083-7
e
SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
m„ B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following sys-
tems, materials, and equipment:
I. Flexible connectors.
® 2. Vibration -control devices.
3. Fire -suppression piping.
4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Below -grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Chrome -plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
7. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.
3.9 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders, and
field -applied jackets.
B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material, thick-
ness, and jacket requirements.
3.10 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Condensate drain piping.
1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F.
2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric
3. Insulation Thickness: '/2"
4. Field -Applied Jacket: None.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: No.
6. Finish: Painted.
B. Service: Chilled -water supply and return.
1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F.
+®- 2. Insulation Material: Molded Mineral fiber, with jacket
3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a. Up through 3" pipe —1 '/2" insulation.
b. Over 3" pipe — 2" insulation.
4. Field -Applied Jacket: PVC in mechanical rooms, cloth jacket elsewhere inside building,
Aluminum jacket for outdoor applications.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes
6. Finish: None.
C. Service: Heating -water supply and return.
1. Operating Temperature: 60 to 200 deg F.
2. Insulation Material: Molded Mineral fiber, with jacket
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15083-8
SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION
3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a. Up to 1-1/2": 1"
b. 2" through 4": 2"
C. Over 4": 3"
4. Field -Applied Jacket: PVC in mechanical rooms, cloth jacket elsewhere inside building,
Aluminum jacket for outdoor applications.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: No.
6. Finish: None.
***END OF SECTION***
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15083-9 _
SECTION 15110 - VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-
tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general duty valves common to several mechanical piping systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Divi-
sion I Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and tempera-
ture classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, di-
mensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list indicating valve and
its application.
C. Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in
Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing, disassembling,
and repairing.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single -Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division I Section
"Materials and Equipment," under "Source Limitations" Paragraph.
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B31.1
for power piping.
C. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15110-1
SECTION 15110 - VALVES
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection.
2. Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew -point tempera-
ture. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
C. Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use hand -
wheels and stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
-
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol-
lowing:
1. Gate Valves:
a. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division.
b. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
C. NIBCO Inc.
d. Red -White Valve Corp.
2. Ball Valves:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Division.
b. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
C. NIBCO Inc.
d. Victaulic Company of America. �.
3. Plug Valves:
a. Grinnell Corp.
b. NIBCO Inc.
C. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
d. Victaulic Company of America.
4. Globe Valves:
a. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division.
b. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
C. NIBCO Inc.
d. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
5. Butterfly Valves:
a. Center Line, Mark Controls Corporation.
b. Grinnell Corp.
C. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
d. NIBCO Inc.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15110-2
SECTION 15110 - VALVES
e. Red -White Valve Corp.
f. Victaulic Company of America.
6. Swing Check Valves:
a. Cla-Val Co.
b. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division.
C. NIBCO Inc.
d. Red -White Valve Corp.
7. Wafer Check Valves:
a. Cla-Val Co.
b. Metraflex Company.
C. NIBCO Inc.
d. Red -White Valve Corp.
e. Victaulic Company of America.
8. Lift Check Valves:
a. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division.
b. NIBCO Inc.
C. Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The).
d. Red -White Valve Corp.
9. Hydronic Balancing Valves:
a. Victaulic
b. Flow Design, Inc
C. Griswold
2.2 BASIC, COMMON FEATURES
A. Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as specified below.
1. Nonrising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full extension of ris-
ing stems.
B. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the "Application Schedule" of Part 3 of this
Section and as required to suit system pressures and temperatures.
C. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following special
operator features:
1. Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn.
2. Lever Handles: For quarter -turn valves 6 inches and smaller, except for plug valves,
which shall have square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10 plug valves.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15110-3
SECTION 15110 -VALVES
3. Chain -Wheel Operators: For valves 4 inches and larger, installed 96 inches or higher
above finished floor elevation.
4. Gear -Drive Operators: For quarter -turn valves 8 inches and larger.
E. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to
receive insulation.
F. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.
G. Threads: ASME B 1.20.1.
H. Flanges: ASME B 16.1 for cast iron, ASME B 16.5 for steel, and ASME B 16.24 for bronze
valves.
2.3 GATE VALVES
A. Gate Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi cold working pressure
(CWP), or Class 150, 300-psi CWP; ASTM B 62 cast -bronze .body and bonnet, solid -bronze
wedge, copper -silicon alloy rising stem, teflon-impregnated packing with bronze packing nut,
threaded or soldered end connections; and with aluminum or malleable -iron handwheel.
B. Gate Valves, 3 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, 200-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-
iron body and bonnet, solid cast-iron wedge, brass -alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, teflon-
impregnated packing with 2-piece packing gland assembly, flanged end connections; and with
cast-iron handwheel.
2.4 BALL VALVES
A. Ball Valves, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 600-psi CWP, ASTM B 584 .
bronze body and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome -plated brass ball, standard port for 1/2-
inch valves and smaller and conventional port for 3/4-inch valves and larger; blowout proof;
bronze or brass stem; teflon seats and seals; threaded or soldered end connections:
1. Operator: Vinyl -covered steel lever handle. ..
2. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping.
3. Memory Stop: For operator handles.
2.5 PLUG VALVES
A. Plug Valves: MSS SP-78, 175-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, cast-iron
plug, Buna N, Viton, or teflon packing, flanged or grooved end connections:
1. Operator: Lever.
2. Operator: Worm and gear with handwheel, sizes 6 inches and larger.
3. Operator: Worm and gear with chain wheel, sizes 6 inches and larger, 96 inches or
higher above floor.
2.6 GLOBE VALVES
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15110-4
SECTION 15110 - VALVES
A. Globe Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi CWP, or Class 150,
300-psi CWP; ASTM B 62 cast -bronze body and screwed bonnet, rubber, bronze, or teflon disc,
silicon bronze -alloy stem, teflon-impregnated packing with bronze nut, threaded or soldered end
connections; and with aluminum or malleable -iron handwheel.
B. Globe Valves, 3 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125, 200-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-
iron body and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable bronze seat and disc, brass -alloy
stem, outside screw and yoke, teflon-impregnated packing with cast-iron follower, flanged end
connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.
2.7 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, 200-psi CWP, 150-psi maximum pressure differential,
ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless -steel stem, field -replaceable
EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals, wafer, lug, or grooved style:
1. Disc Type: Elastomer-coated ductile iron.
2. Operator for Sizes 2 Inches to 6 Inches: Standard lever handle with memory stop.
2.8 CHECK VALVES
A. Swing Check Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi CWP, or
am Class 150, 300-psi CWP; horizontal swing, Y-pattern, ASTM B 62 cast -bronze body and cap,
rotating bronze disc with rubber seat or composition seat, threaded or soldered end connections:
B. Swing Check Valves, 3 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-71, Class 125, 200-psi CWP,
ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted cap, horizontal -swing bronze disc, flanged or grooved
end connections.
No C. Wafer Check Valves: Class 125, 200-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body, bronze
disc/plates, stainless -steel pins and springs, Buna N seals, installed between flanges.
D. Lift Check Valves: Class 125, ASTM B 62 bronze body and cap (main components), horizontal
or vertical pattern, lift -type, bronze disc or Buna N rubber disc with stainless -steel holder
threaded or soldered end connections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfac-
tory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15110-5
SECTION 15110 - VALVES
C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made acces-
sible by such operation.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable
for service, and freedom from defects and damage.
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. w"
D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.
F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
G. For chain -wheel operators, extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor elevation.
H. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.
2. Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3. Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb.
3.3 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS
A. -Cut tube square and to exact lengths.
B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to a
bright finish. Clean valve socket.
C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube. D. Open gate and globe valves to fully open position.
E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.
F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve. Rotate
tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15110-6
SECTION 15110 - VALVES
G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact. Feed solder
until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once the
solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.
3.4 THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall to
determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.
B. Align threads at point of assembly.
C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry seal
threading is specified.
D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is
being threaded.
3.5 FLANGED CONNECTIONS
A. Align flange surfaces parallel.
B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as
flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually
and uniformly with a torque wrench.
C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for proper
shutoff and retention.
3.6 VALVE END SELECTION
A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipeltube connections:
1. Copper Tube Size, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Solder ends
2. Steel Pipe Sizes, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end.
3. Steel Pipe Sizes, 3 Inches and Larger: Grooved end or flanged.
3.7 APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe, ball, and but-
terfly for throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve appli-
cations and arrangements.
B. Heating Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
1. Gate Valves: Class 150, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system.
2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi CWP, with stem extension and memory stop.
3. Plug Valves: Viton or teflon packing.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM —14VAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15110-7
SECTION 15110 - VALVES
4. Butterfly Valves: Nickel -plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or epoxy -coated ductile
iron disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
5. Bronze Swing Check: Class 150, with composition seat.
6. Check Valves: Iron swing, wafer, or lift type, as indicated. Swing check shall be
Class 150 with bronze seat ring.
C. Chilled -Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
1. Gate Valves: Class 150, bronze body; or Class 125, cast-iron body.
2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi CWP, with stem extension and memory stop.
3. Plug Valves: Buna N packing.
4. Butterfly Valves: Nickel -plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or elastomer-coated duc-
tile iron disc; EPDM sleeve and stem seals.
5. Check Valves: Class 125, bronze body swing check with rubber seat; Class 125, cast-
iron body swing check; Class 125, cast-iron body wafer check; or Class 125, cast-iron
body lift check.
6. Balancing Valves: Use Globe style with memory stop and test ports for 4" and smaller ,
7. Balancing Valves: Use Butterfly style with memory stop and test ports for 6" and larger
D. Condenser Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
1. Gate Valves: Class 125, bronze body; or Class 125, cast-iron body.
2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi CWP, with memory stop.
3. Plug Valves: Buna N packing.
4. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze body with bronze or teflon disc; or Class 125, cast-iron
body.
5. Butterfly Valves: Aluminum bronze, epoxy -coated ductile iron disc; EPDM sleeve and
stem seals.
6. Check Valves: Class 125, bronze body swing check with rubber seat; Class 125, cast-
iron body swing check; Class 125, cast-iron body wafer check; or Class 125, cast-iron
body lift check.
7. Balancing Valves: Use Globe style with memory stop and test ports for 4" and smaller
8. Balancing Valves: Use Butterfly style with memory stop and test ports for 6" and larger
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before
final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.
***END OF SECTION***
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM -- HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15110-8
SECTION 15122 — METERS AND GAGES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Not all listed materials and systems may be utilized for this project. Use applicable items, as
required.
B. This Section includes the following meters and gages for mechanical systems:
1. Thermometers.
2. Gages.
3. Test plugs.
4. Flow meters.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated; include performance curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Schedule for thermometers, gages and flow meters indicating manufacturer's
number, scale range, and location for each.
AM
C. Product Certificates: For each type of thermometer, gage and flow meter, signed by product
manufacturer.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flow meters to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
[.WB9 L�PGa��Qa R�
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
�. ok"TH, TEX.
SECTION 15122 — METERS AND GAGES
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified. _
2.2 METAL -CASE, LIQUID -IN -GLASS THERMOMETERS =
A. Manufacturers:
1. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc.
2. Trerice, H. O. Co.
3. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
B. Case: Die-cast aluminum, 7 inches long.
C. Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury filled, with magnifying lens.
D. Tube Background: Satin -faced, non -reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale
markings.
E. Window: Glass.
F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with
locking device.
G. Stem: Copper -plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermo well installation and of length to suit
installation.
H. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of
1.5 percent of range.
2.3 THERMOWELLS
�r
A. Manufacturers:
1. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc.
2. Trerice, H. O. Co.
3. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
B. Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used.
C. Description: Pressure -tight, socket -type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type,
diameter, and length required to hold thermometer.
2.4 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc.
2. Trerice, H. O. Co.
Weiss Instruments, Inc.
tI,i,,gE S COLLISEUM —HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15122-2
L
A i
an
SECTION 15122 - METERS AND GAGES
B. Direct -Mounting, Dial -Type Pressure Gages: Indicating -dial type complying with
ASME B40.100.
Case: Liquid -filled type, drawn steel or cast aluminum, 4" diameter for thermowell
mounting.
2.
Pressure -Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4, bottom -outlet type unless back -outlet type is
indicated.
4.
Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
5.
Dial: Satin -faced, non -reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
6.
Pointer: Red metal.
7.
Window: Glass.
8.
Ring: Metal.
9.
Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale.
10.
Vacuum -Pressure Range: 30-in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure.
11.
Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.
MKI
C. Remote
-Mounting, Dial -Type Pressure Gages: ASME B40.100, indicating -dial type.
1.
Case: Dry type, drawn steel or cast aluminum, 4-1/2-inch diameter with holes for panel
mounting.
2.
Pressure -Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4, bottom -outlet type unless back -outlet type is
indicated.
4.
Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
5.
Dial: Satin -faced, non -reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
6.
Pointer: Red metal.
7.
Window: Glass.
8.
Ring: Metal.
9.
Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half] [B, plus or minus 2 percent
of middle half scale.
10.
Vacuum -Pressure Range: 30-in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure.
11.
Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.
D. Pressure -Gage Fittings:
1. Valves: NPS 1/4 brass or stainless -steel needle type.
-` 2. Syphons: NPS 1/4 coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.
3. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion -resistant, porous -metal
disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
2.5 TEST PLUGS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Flow Design, Inc.
2. Sisco Manufacturing Co.
3. Trerice, H. O. Co.
4. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM - HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
15122-3
SECTION 15122 — METERS AND GAGES
B. Description: Corrosion -resistant brass or stainless -steel body with core inserts and gasketed and
threaded cap, with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated piping.
C. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.
D. Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing rubber valves.
1. Insert material for air, water, oil, or gas service at 20 to 200 deg F shall be CR.
2. Insert material for air or water service at minus 30 to plus 275 deg F shall be EPDM.
E. Test Kit: Furnish one test kit(s) containing one pressure gage and adaptor, one thermometer(s),
and carrying case. Pressure gage, adapter probes, and thermometer sensing elements shall be of
diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.
1. Pressure Gage: Small bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch-diameter dial and
probe. Dial range shall be 0 to 200 psig.
2. Low -Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- diameter -
dial and tapered -end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be 25 to 125 deg F.
3. High -Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with l- to 2-inch- diameter
dial and tapered -end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be 0 to 220 deg F.
4. Carrying case shall have formed instrument padding.
2.6 TURBINE FLOWMETERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Engineering Measurements Company.
2. Midwest Instruments & Controls Corp.
3. ONICON Incorporated. .�
4. Thermo Measurement Ltd.
B. Description: Turbine insertion type with integral transmitter for inserting into piping and
measuring flow directly in gallons per minute. 24 Volt DC Supply Voltage
C. Construction: Nickle plated brass or stainless -steel body; with plastic turbine or impeller.
D. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum.
E. Temperature Rating: 180 deg F minimum continuous.
F. Output: 4-20ma, 0-10 VDC Analog (Coordinate actual requirements with Controls Contractor)
G. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2-1/2 percent. (.33 to 20 ffi/s flow range)
2.7 VORTEX FLOWMETERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Kele model V-bar 700 or Fluidyne
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15122-4
O
SECTION 15122 — METERS AND GAGES
B. Description: Vortex type flow sensors with integral flow transmitter. 24 Volt DC Supply
Voltage
C.
Construction: Stainless steel construction
D.
Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum.
E.
Temperature Rating: 180 deg F minimum continuous.
F.
Output: 4-20ma, 0-10 VDC Analog (Coordinate actual requirements with Controls Contractor)
G.
System Accuracy: 1% of rate (.33 to 20 ft/s flow range)
2.8
PITOT-TUBE FLOWMETERS (use at all Air Handlers for Test and Balance only
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Dieterich Standard Inc.(Annubar)
2. Flow Design, Inc
3. Victaulic
4. Taco, Inc.
5. Veris, Inc.
6. Approved equal
B.
Description: Insertion -type, differential -pressure design for inserting probe into piping and
measuring flow directly in gallons per minute.
C.
Construction: Stainless -steel probe of length to span inside of pipe; with gage sets, etc.
included.
D.
Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum.
E.
Temperature Rating: 250 deg F minimum.
F.
Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent between 20% and 80% of flow range
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS
A. Install liquid -in -glass thermometers in the following locations:
1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air -handling units being modified at John Justin
Arena.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS Y
SECTION 15122 — METERS AND GAGES
B. Provide the following temperature range for thermometers:
1. Chilled Water: 0 to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
3.2 TEST PLUG APPLICATIONS
A. Install test plugs as indicated on plans, or otherwise required for maintenance and balancing.
3.3 GAGE APPLICATIONS
A. Install dry -case -type pressure gages for discharge of each pressure -reducing valve.
B. Install liquid -filled -case -type pressure gages at suction and discharge of new pumps, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.4 INSTALLATIONS
A. Install direct -mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
B. Install thermo-wells with socket extending one-third of diameter of pipe and in vertical position
in piping tees where thermometers are indicated.
C. Install direct -mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at most
readable position.
D. Install remote -mounting pressure gages on panel.
E. Install needle -valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except
steam).
F. Install test plugs in tees in piping.
G. Install flow indicators, in accessible positions for easy viewing, in piping systems.
H. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow -measuring elements
and flow meters as prescribed by manufacturers written instructions.
I. Install flow meter elements in accessible positions in piping systems.
J. Install differential -pressure -type flow meter elements with at least minimum straight lengths of
pipe upstream and downstream from element as prescribed by manufacturer's written
instructions.
K. Install wafer -orifice flow meter elements between pipe flanges.
L. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.
W ILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
15122-6
SECTION 15122 — METERS AND GAGES
M. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable indicators in accessible locations.
N. Install flow meters at discharge of hydronic system pumps and at inlet of hydronic air coils.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after installation.
B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
***END OF SECTION***
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15122-7
CFCTION 15177 - VARTART.F. FRFOTTF.N(:Y DRTVF.0
PART 1 - GENFRAl. ••
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD).
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 15075 - Mechanical Identification: Engraved nameplates.
1.3 REFERENCES y-
A. NEMA ICS 3.1- Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection,
Installation and Operation of Variable Frequency Drive Systems.
B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
C. UL, and cUL Approved"
D. IEEE Standard 444 (ANSI-C343)
E. IEEE Standard 519
F. IFC: 146A
G. UL 508C (Power Conversion)
H. CSA 22.2 No. 14-95 (Industrial Control Equipment)
1. UL 1995 (Plenum rating)
J. EN 50178 (LVD)
K. EN 61800-3
L. IEC 529
M. FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Subpart B
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15172 - 1
L9 �T�II IIC•7�i� a : :: : • 1 ► '� • :
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings shall include: Wiring diagrams, electrical schematics, front and side views
on of enclosures, overall dimensions, conduit entrance locations and requirements, nameplate
legends, physical layout and enclosure details.
Y„ B. Product Data: Provide data sheets showing; voltage, ratings of customer use switching and
over -current protective devices, short circuit ratings, and weights.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions and Technical Manuals: Indicate application
conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under
regulatory requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, installation, and starting of adjustable speed drive. Document the
sequence of operation, cautions and warnings, trouble shooting procedures, spare parts lists
and programming guidance.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. VFD shall have a minimum MTBF (mean time between failure) rating of 28 years
(245,280 Hours).
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Include instructions for starting and operating VFD, and describe operating limits, which
may result in hazardous or unsafe conditions.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer must have a minimum of 25 years of documented experience,
specializing in variable frequency drives.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site, under provisions of
Section 0 16 10.
B. Accept VFD on site in original packing. Inspect for damage.
C. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping, or provide an additional
heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover, to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris,
and traffic.
or
D. Handle carefully, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, to avoid damage
to components, enclosure, and finish.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15172 - 2
A. Provide VFD warranty, for one year from date of startup, not to exceed 18 months from
date of shipment. Warranty shall include parts, and labor allowance for repair hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. ABB
2. Reliant
3. Yaskawa
4. GE
5. Motors should be inverter duty rated, per NEMA MG parts 30 and 31, for motor -
drive compatibility.
2.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide enclosed variable frequency drives suitable for operation at the current,
voltage, and horsepower indicated on the schedule. Conform to requirements of NEMA
ICS 3.1.
2.3 RATINGS
A. VFD must operate, without fault or failure, when voltage varies plus 10% or minus 15%
from rating, and frequency varies plus or minus 5% from rating.
B. VFD shall be 480 volts, 60 Hz, 3 Phase
C. Displacement Power Factor. 0.98 over entire range of operating speed and load
D. Operating Ambient Temperature: -10 degrees C to 40 degrees C (14 degrees F to 104
degrees F)
E. Humidity: 01/o to 95% non -condensing.
F. Altitude: to 3,300 feet, higher altitudes achieved by derating.
G. Minimum Efficiency: 96% at half speed; 98% at full speed.
H. Starting Torque: 100% starting torque shall be available from 0.5 Hz. to 60 Hz.
1. Overload capability: 110% of rated FLA (Full Load Amps) for 60 seconds; 150% of rated
FLA, instantaneously.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — RVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15172 - 3
J. The VFD must meet the requirements for Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) above 7
MHz as specified by FCC regulations, part 15, subpart J, Class A devices.
K. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) compliance:
Given the information provided by the customer's electric power single line diagram and
distribution transformer data, the VFD manufacturer shall carry out an analysis of the
system. The analysis reviews the potential for the proposed equipment, and any existing
equipment, to meet IEEE 519 (tables 10.2 and 10.3) recommendations at the Point of
Common Coupling (PCC). The result of the analysis shall determine if additional power
quality improvement measures should be included in the proposal to meet the THD
recommendations of IEEE 519. The PCC shall be at the primary side of the main
distribution transformer.
L. VFDs must have a minimum short circuit rating of 65K amps RMS (100K amps RMS
with a DC bus reactor) without additional input fusing.
2.4 DESIGN
A. VFD shall employ microprocessor based inverter logic, isolated from all power circuits.
B. VFD shall include surface mount technology with protective coating.
C. VFD shall employ a PWM (Pulse Width Modulated) power electronic system, consisting
Of.
1. Input Section:
a. VFD input power stage shall convert three-phase AC line power into a
fixed DC voltage via a solid state full wave diode rectifier, with MOV
(Metal Oxide Varistor) surge protection.
2. Intermediate Section:
a. DC bus as a supply to the VFD output Section shall maintain a
fined voltage with filtering and short circuit protection.
b. DC bus shall be interfaced with the VFD diagnostic logic circuit, for
continuous monitoring and protection of the power components.
c. 25 HP to 150 HP @ 208 VAC, 30 HP to 150 HP @ 240 VAC, and 40
HP to 500 HP 480 VAC, VFDs shall include a 3% DC bus reactor to
minimize reflected harmonics.
3. Output Section
a. Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs) shall convert DC bus voltage
to variable frequency and voltage.
b. The VFD shall employ PWM sine coded output technology to power the
motor.
D. The VFD must be selected for operation at carrier frequencies at or above 5 kHz
without derating to satisfy the conditions for current, voltage, and horsepower as indicated
on the equipment schedule. Exception to this requirement is allowed only for VFDs
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15172 - 4
providing 506 amps or more.
E. VFD shall have an adjustable carrier frequency: The carrier frequency shall have a
minimum of six settings to allow adjustment in the field.
F. VFD shall have embedded Building Automation System (BAS) protocols for network
communications.
G. VFD shall include two independent analog inputs. One shall be 0-10 VDC. The other shall
be programmable for either 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA. Either input shall respond to a
programmable bias and gain.
H. VFD shall include a minimum of seven multi -function digital input terminals, capable of
being programmed to determine the function on a change of state. These terminals shall
provide up to 30 functions, including, but not limited to:
1. Remote4xxml operation selection
2. Detection of external fault condition
3. Remote Reset
4. Multi -step speed commands
5. Run permissive
6. Floating control
I. VFD shall include two 0-10 VDC analog output for monitoring, or "speed tracking" the
VFD. The analog output signal will be proportional to output frequency, output current,
output power, PID (Proportional, Integral, Derivative control) feedback or DC bus voltage.
J. VFD shall provide terminals for remote input contact closure, to allow starting in the
automatic mode.
K. VFD shall include at least one external fault input, which shall be programmable for a
normally open or normally closed contact. These terminals can be used for connection of
firestats, Gcezestats, high pressure limits or similar safety devices.
L. VFD shall include two form "A" contacts and one form "C" contact, capable of being
programmed to determine conditions that must be met in order for them to change state.
These output relay contacts shall be rated for at least IA at 250 VAC and shall provide up
to 18 functions, including, but not limited to:
1. Speed agree detection.
2. Low and high frequency detection.
3. Missing frequency reference detection.
4. Overtorque(Undertorque detection
5. Drive Running
6. Drive Faulted
M. VFD shall include a power loss ride through of 2 seconds.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15172 - 5
SECTION 15177 - VARIABLE FRF.n[IENCY nBIVF.R
N. VFD shall have DC injection braking capability, to prevent fan "wind milling" at start or
stop, adjustable, current limited.
O. VFD shall have a motor preheat function to prevent moisture accumulation in an idle
motor.
P. VFD shall have a digital operator with program copy and storage functions to simplify set
up of multiple drives. The digital operator shall be interchangeable for all drive ratings.
Q. VFD shall include a front mounted, sealed keypad operator, with an English
Language (or one of 6 additional international languages) illuminated LCD display. The
operator will provide complete programming, program copying, operating, monitoring, and
diagnostic capability. Keys provided shall include industry standard commands for Hand,
M and Auto functions.
R. VFD plain language display shall provide readouts of; output frequency in hertz, PID
feedback in percent, output voltage in volts, output current in amps, output power in
kilowatts, D.C. bus voltage in volts, interface terminal status, and fault codes. All displays
shall be viewed in an easy -to -read illuminated LCD with International language
selectability.
S. VFD unit shall include the following meters to estimate use of energy:
1. Elapsed Time Meter
2. Kilowatt Meter
3. Kilowatt Hour Meter
T. VFD shall include PI control logic, to provide closed loop setpoint control capability, from
a feedback signal, eliminating the need for closed loop output signals from a building
automation system. The PI controller shall have a differential feedback capability for closed
loop control of fans and pumps for pressure, flow or temperature regulation in response to
dual feedback signals.
U. An energy saving sleep function shall be available in both open loop (follower mode) and
closed loop (PI) control, providing significant energy savings while minimizing
operating hours on driven equipment. When the sleep function senses a minimal deviation
of a feedback signal from setpoint, or low demand in open loop control, the system reacts
by stopping the driven equipment. Upon receiving an increase in speed command signal
deviation, the drive and equipment resume normal operation.
V. VFD shall include loss of input signal protection, with a selectable response strategy
including speed default to a percent of the most recent speed.
W. VFD shall include electronic thermal overload protection for both the drive and motor. The
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15172 - 6
SECTION 15172 - VARTART.F. FRF.011F.Nt V DRTVF.4
electronic thermal motor overload shall be approved by UL. Ifthe electronic thermal motor
overload is not approved by UL, a separate UL approved thermal overload relay shall be
provided in the VFD enclosure.
X. VFD shall include the following program functions:
1. Critical frequency rejection capability: 3 selectable, adjustable deadbands.
2. Auto restart capability: 0 to 10 attempts with adjustable delay between attempts.
3. Ability to close fault contact after the completion of all fault restart attempts.
4. Stall prevention capability.
5. "S" curve soft start capability.
6. Bi-directional "Speed search" capability, in order to start a rotating load.
7. 14 preset and l custom volts per hertz pattern.
8. Heatsink over temperature speed fold back capability
9. Terminal status indication.
10. Program copy and storage in a removable digital operator.
11. Current limit adjustment capability, from 30% to 200% of rated full load current
of the VFD.
12. Motor pre -heat capability
13. Input signal or serial communication loss detection and response strategy.
14. Anti "wind -milling" function capability.
15. Automatic energy saving function.
16. Undertorque/Overtorque Detection.
Y. VFD shall include factory settings for all parameters, and the capability for those settings to
be reset.
Z. VFD shall include the capability to adjust the following functions, while the VFD is
running:
1. Speed command input.
2. Acceleration adjustment from 0 to 6000 seconds.
3. Deceleration adjustment from 0 to 6000 seconds.
4. Select from 5 preset speeds.
5. Analog monitor display.
6. Removal of digital operator.
2.5 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Manual Bypass shall be provided VFD and bypass components shall be mounted inside a
common NEMA 1 enclosure, fully pre -wired, and ready for installation as a single UL listed
device. Bypass shall include the following:
1. Input, output, and bypass contactors, to disconnect power to the VFD, when the motor is
running in the bypass mode.
2. 115 VAC control transformer, with fused primary.
3. Thermal overload relay, to protect the motor while operating in the bypass mode.
4. Circuit breaker/disconnect switch, with a pad -lockable through -the -door handle mechanism.
5. Control and safety circuit terminal strip.
6. Hand/Off/Auto selector switch shall provide the following operation:
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15172 - 7
Mile M • 1 ► W
• Hand Position - The drive is given a start command, operation is via the local
speed input (digital operator or speed pot.). If in bypass mode, the motor is
running.
• Off Position - The start command is removed, all speed inputs are ignored,
power is still applied to the drive. If in bypass mode, the motor is stopped.
• Auto Position - The drive is enabled to receive a start command and speed
input from a building automation system. If in bypass mode, the motor
start/stop is controlled by the building automation system
7. Annunciation contacts for drive run, drive fault, bypass run and motor OL/safety fault.
B. Soft start on transfer to bypass shall be provided.
C. Line reactors shall be provided on the input side of the drive for harmonic suppression.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. All standard and optional features shall be included in a single NEMA 1, plenum rated
enclosure with a UL certification label.
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. In -circuit testing of all printed circuit boards shall be conducted, to insure the proper
mounting and correct value of all components.
B. All printed circuit boards shall be burned in for 96 hours, at 85 degrees C.
C. Final printed circuit board assemblies shall be functionally tested, via computerized test
equipment. All tests and acceptance criteria shall be preprogrammed All test results shall
be stored as detailed quality assurance data-
D. All fully assembled controls shall be functionally tested, with fully loaded induction motors.
The combined test data shall then be analyzed, to insure adherence to quality assurance
specifications.
E. Inspect and production test, under load, each completed VFD assembly.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surface is suitable for VFD installation.
B. Do not install VFD until the building environment can be maintained, within the service
conditions required by the manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15172 - 8
SFCTION 15172 - VARIARI.F FRF011FNC.Y DRIVES
A. Install VFD where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and
NEMA ICS 3.
B. Tighten accessible connections and mechanical fasteners after placing VFD.
C. Provide a nameplate label on each VFD, identifying rated horsepower, full load amperes,
model number, service factor and voltagelphase rating.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and
grounding.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Make final adjustments to installed VFD, to assure proper operation of HVAC systems.
***END OF SECTION***
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15172 - 9
SECTION 15181 - HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping, special -duty valves, and hydronic specialties for hot-water
heating, chilled -water cooling, and condensate drain piping that is modified or replaced in this
project.
B. Not all listed materials and systems may be used for this project. Use applicable items, as
required.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of piping used.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe support assemblies,
alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and their attachment to the building structure.
Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
D. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the
following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For hydronic specialties and special -duty valves to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.
F. Provide product data on all hydronic specialties.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, 'Building Services Piping," for materials,
products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME
,, WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15181-1
SECTION 15181 - HYDRONIC PIPING
label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with the ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system components with
other building components including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression -system
components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations.
C. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into base.
F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls and floor
assemblies.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Water Treatment Chemicals: Furnish sufficient chemicals for initial system startup and for
preventive maintenance for one year from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Bell & Gossett
B.
Griswold
C.
Mason
D.
Keckley
E.
Armstrong
F.
Hoffman
G.
Perma-Pipe
H.
Approved Equal
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
A. General: Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting
materials.
2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15181-2
SECTION 15181 - HYDRONIC PIPING
A. Steel Pipe, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless) or Type F (furnace -butt
welded), Grade A, Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends.
B. Steel Pipe, NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12: ASTM A 53, Type E (electric -resistance welded),
Grade A, Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends.
1. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, black steel;
seamless for NPS 2 and smaller and electric -resistance welded for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
C. Cast -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.4; Classes 125 and 250.
D. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.3, Classes 150 and 300.
E. Malleable -Iron Unions: ASME B 16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300.
F. Cast -Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B 16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised
ground face, and bolt holes spot faced.
G. Wrought -Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.
H. Wrought Cast- and Forged -Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B 16.5, including bolts,
nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
1. Material Group: L L
2. End Connections: Butt welding.
3. Facings: Raised face.
1. Flexible Connectors: Stainless -steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire -reinforcing
protective jacket; 150-psig minimum working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating
temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded -end connections to match equipment
connected and shall be capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.
J. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: Fiber -reinforced rubber body with steel flanges drilled
to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges; operating temperatures up to 250 deg F and
pressures up to 150 psig.
K. Packed, Slip, Expansion Joints: 150-psig minimum working pressure, steel pipe fitting
consisting of telescoping body and slip -pipe sections, packing ring, packing, limit rods, flanged
ends, and chrome -plated finish on slip -pipe telescoping section.
L. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis of pipe
being welded.
M. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design
temperatures and pressures.
2.4 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
H. W":"-TES.
SECTION 15181 - HYDRONIC PIPING
A. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig working pressure; 225
deg F operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; with NPS 1/8
discharge connection and NPS 1/2 inlet connection.
B. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body and
nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig working pressure; 240 deg F operating temperature; with
NPS 1/4 discharge connection and NPS 1/2 inlet connection. Pipe to approved drain.
C. Y-Pattern Strainers: 125-psig working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B),
flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger, threaded connections for NPS 2 and smaller, bolted
cover, perforated stainless -steel basket, and bottom drain connection.
D. Flexible Connectors: Stainless -steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire -reinforcing
protective jacket; 150-psig minimum working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating"
temperature. Connectors shall have flanged- or threaded -end connections to match equipment
connected and shall be capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.
E. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: (Mason Type SFDEJ) Fiber -reinforced rubber body
with steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges; operating temperatures
up to 250 deg F and pressures up to 150 psig.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Hot and Chilled Water, NPS 2 and Smaller: Aboveground, use Schedule 40 steel pipe with
threaded joints.
B. Hot and Chilled Water, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Schedule 40 steel pipe with welded and flanged
joints.
C. Condensate Drain Lines: Type L drawn -temper copper tubing with soldered joints
3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. General -Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve types:
1. Shutoff Duty: Gate, ball, and butterfly valves.
2. Throttling Duty: Globe, ball, and butterfly valves.
B. Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connection to
each piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is connected in the branch lime.
Install throttling duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return connections to
each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated, or otherwise required for balancing.
WILL ROGERS COLLISELM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15181-4 �,
SECTION 15181 - HYDRONIC PIPING
C. Install calibrated balancing valves (globe style with test ports) in the return water line of each
heating or cooling element and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing
of valves.
B. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple
with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
D. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe,
with the takeoff coming out the bottom of the main pipe. For up -feed risers, install the takeoff
coming out the top of the main pipe.
E. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure -reducing valve, solenoid valve,
in -line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blow -down
connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blow -off connection for
strainers smaller than NPS 2.
F. Anchor piping and provide approved thermal expansion system with fitting to accommodate for
proper direction of expansion and contraction.
G. Install Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors at inlet and outlet connections to pumps, chillers,
and cooling towers.
3.4 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat -transfer coils, and elsewhere as required
for system air venting.
B. Install automatic air vents in accessible spaces at high points of system piping, at heat -transfer
coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. Pipe to approved drain.
3.5 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connections.
B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet and outlet connections.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15181-5
SECTION 15181 - HYDRONIC PIPING
A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test
pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be
capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged
joints to isolate equipment.
5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to
protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to
freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be
used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped air.
Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of liquid.
3. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is full of
water.
4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design
pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve,
or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of
vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7
times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 2 hours, examine piping,
joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing
components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
6. Prepare written report of testing.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has been
completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.
B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system:
1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.
2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation.
3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.
4. Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating
freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
6. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
7. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to design
requirements.
8. Lubricate motors and bearings.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15181-6
r_,
a.
SECTION 15181 - HYDRONIC PIPING
3.8 CLEANING
A. Flush new hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer
screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before balancing, remove
disposable fine -mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.
***END OF SECTION***
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15181-7
SECTION 15185-1-IYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following categories of hydronic pumps for hydronic systems:
1. Double -suction pumps.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities; shipping, installed,
and operating weights; furnished specialties; final impeller dimensions; and accessories for each
type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.
B. Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
a.
A. UL Compliance: Fabricate and label pumps to comply with UL 778, "Motor -Operated Water
Pumps," for construction requirements.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces
and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe
openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed -in plugs.
B. Store pumps in dry location.
C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.
D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.
E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
1.6 COORDINATION
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15185-1
SECTION 15185 - HYDRONIC PUMPS
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal for each pump.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Flexible -Coupled, Double -Suction, Horizontal Split Case Pumps:
a. PACO Pumps.
b. Bell & Gossett
C. Taco; Fabricated Products Div.
2.2 GENERAL PUMP REQUIREMENTS
A. Pump Units: Factory assembled and tested. Provide pump with capability for minimum of 15%
additional impeller (diameter) increase above design size.
B. Motors: Include built-in, thermal -overload protection and grease -lubricated ball bearings.
Select each motor to be nonoverloading over full range of pump performance curve including
the requirement stated in section 2.2, A.
C. Motors shall be energy efficient, unless otherwise indicated. Minimum efficiency as indicated
according to IEEE 112, Test Method B. Include motors with higher efficiency than "average
standard industry motors" according to IEEE 112, Test Method B, if efficiency is not indicated.
If the pump motor is controlled by a variable frequency drive (VFD) the motor shall be rated for
use with a VFD.
no 2.3 FLEXIBLE -COUPLED, DOUBLE -SUCTION, HORIZONTAL SPLIT CASE PUMPS
A. Description: Base -mounted, centrifugal, flexible -coupled, double -suction, single -stage, bronze -
fitted, axially split case design; rated for 175-psig minimum working pressure and a continuous
water temperature of 225 deg F, with mechanical seals and impeller mounted between bearings.
1. Casing: Cast iron; with ASME B 16.1, Class 250 flanged pipe connections. Include
threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet connections, vent valve at high point of volute,
and threaded drain plug at low point of volute.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15185-2
SECTION 15185 - HYDRONIC PUMPS
a. Casing shall allow removal and replacement of impeller without disconnecting
piping.
2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, closed, double
suction, and keyed to shaft.
3. Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze casing ring.
4. Shaft and Sleeve: Stainless -steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
5. Pump Shaft Bearings: Grease -lubricated ball bearings contained in cast-iron housing.
6. Seals: Mechanical, with carbon -steel rotating ring, stainless -steel spring, ceramic seat,
and flexible bellows and gasket.
7. Coupling: Flexible -spacer type, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft
misalignment; with flange and sleeve section that can be disassembled and removed
without removing pump or motor.
8. Coupling Guard: Steel, removable, and attached to mounting frame.
9. Mounting Frame: Welded -steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from
ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate for mounting pump casing, coupling
guard, and motor. Field -drill motor -mounting holes for field -installed motors. Include
drain pan wit minimum %" drain connection.
a. Option: Cast-iron frames are acceptable. -
10. Motor: Secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment.
2.4 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS
A. Suction Diffuser: Angle or straight pattern, 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body and end
cap, pump -inlet fitting; with bronze startup and bronze or stainless -steel permanent strainers;
bronze or stainless -steel straightening vanes; drain plug; and factory- or field -fabricated support.
B. Triple -Duty Valve: Angle or straight pattern, 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body, pump- p+
discharge fitting; with drain plug and bronze -fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features.
2.5 PITOT-TUBE FLOWMETERS (use on all pump discharges, unless otherwise indicated).
A. Manufacturers:
1. Dieterich Standard Inc.(Annubar)
2. Flow Design, Inc
3. Victaulic
4. Taco, Inc.
5. Veris, Inc.
6. Approved equal
B. Description: Insertion -type, differential -pressure design for inserting probe into piping and
measuring flow directly in gallons per minute.
C. Construction: Stainless -steel probe of length to span inside of pipe; with gage sets, etc.
included.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15185-3
SECTION 15185 - HYDRONIC PUMPS
D. Provide portable meter set(s), as required, to accommodate pump systems.
E. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum.
F. Temperature Rating: 250 deg F minimum.
G. Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow.
H. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent between 20% and 80% of flow range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor -bolt locations for compliance with requirements for
installation.
1. Examine roughing -in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections
before pump installation.
2. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be
installed.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install pumps according to HI1.1-1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature,
Definitions, Application and Operation."
B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance, including removing motors,
impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Support pumps and piping separately so piping is not supported by pumps.
D. Set base -mounted pumps on concrete foundation. Disconnect coupling halves before setting.
Do not reconnect couplings until alignment operations have been completed.
1. Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims, or on metal wedges with
small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of 3/4 to 1-1/2 inches
.. between pump base and foundation for grouting.
2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check coupling
faces and suction and discharge flanges of pump to verify that they are level and plumb.
3.3 ALIGNMENT
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15185-4
SECTION 15185 - HYDRONIC PUMPS
A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting them on foundations, after
grout has been set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and after piping connections have
been made.
B. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.
C. Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment by methods specified in HI 1.1-
1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation."
D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill
baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in
place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are the same size as piping connected to pumps.
D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.
E. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of base -mounted pumps.
F. Install triple -duty valve on discharge side of base -mounted pumps.
G. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base -mounted pumps between
pump casing and valves.
H. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge. Install at integral pressure -gage tappings
where provided.
I. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
J. Electrical power and control wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.
K. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Verify that pumps are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
B. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written instructions and
the Contract Documents.
an
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15185-5
IM
SECTION 15185 - HYDRONIC PUMPS
C. Perform the following preventive maintenance operations and checks before starting:
1. Lubricate bearings.
2. Remove grease -lubricated bearing covers, flush bearings with kerosene, and clean
thoroughly. Fill with new lubricant according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Disconnect coupling and check motor for proper rotation that matches direction marked
on pump casing.
4. Verify that pumps are free to rotate by hand and that pumps for handling hot liquids are
free to rotate with pumps hot and cold. Do not operate pumps if they are bound or drag,
until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
5. Check suction piping connections for tightness to avoid drawing air into pumps.
6. Clean strainers.
7. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
D. Starting procedure for pumps is as follows:
1. Prime pumps by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pumps for
operation.
2. Open cooling water -supply valves in cooling water supply to bearings, where applicable.
3. Open cooling water -supply valves if stuffmg boxes are water cooled.
4. Open sealing liquid -supply valves if pumps are so fitted.
5. Open warm-up valves of pumps handling hot liquids if pumps are not normally kept at
operating temperature.
.. 6. Open circulating line valves if pumps should not be operated against dead shutoff.
7. Start motors.
8. Open discharge valves slowly.
9. Check mechanical seals for leakage.
10. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.
11. Close circulating line valves once there is sufficient flow through pumps to prevent
overheating.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps as specified below:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining pumps.
2. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
***END OF SECTION***
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15185-6
SECTION 15763 — HYDRONIC AIR HANDLER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. This Section includes arrangement, construction, and controls of new hydronic air handling
units to be installed for this project.
Air handlers shall be tested and rated in accordance with ARI standard 430 and are ETL listed.
1.2 CONFIGURATION
A. Horizontal Units: An assembly including cabinet, filter frame, chassis, coil, drain pan, fan,
and motor in blow -through configuration with hydronic cooling coil and hydronic heating coil
where scheduled.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
as
A. Performance Ratings: Conform to ARI, and bear the ARI certified rating seal.
B. Fabrication: Conform to ARI
C. Air Handling Units: Product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of components
who issues complete catalog data on total product."
D. Sound Ratings: Test to ARI, and bear ARI seal.
p.
E. Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures in accordance with ARI
410.
F. Base performance on sea level conditions."
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Division 1.
B. Indicate on shop drawings complete assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clear-
ances, construction details, and field connection details.
C. Indicate on product data all dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance, motor «--
electrical characteristics, gauges and finishes of materials. Indicate on submittal dimensions,
weight, capacities, etc., that are different than basis of design.
D. Provide fan performance curves with specified operating point clearly plotted. Base perform-
ance curves on tests in accordance with current ARI standards. Conduct tests in an ARI ap-
proved laboratory.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15763 - 1
SECTION 15763 — HYDRONIC AIR HANDLER
E. Submit sound power levels for both fan outlet and casing radiation at scheduled conditions.
Base sound power levels on actual test data on the fan sizes and accessories being furnished.
am Conduct tests in an ARI approved laboratory. If unit exceeds submitted sound power levels,
manufacturer shall provide the necessary sound attenuators.
F. Submit product data of filter media, filter sizes and quantities, filter performance data, filter as-
sembly, and filter frames.
1.5 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standards:
ANSI/AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
ANSI/AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
ANSI/UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units.
B. American Refrigeration Institute (ARI)
ARI 410 - Forced -Circulation Air -Cooling and Air -Heating Coils.
ARI 430 - Standard for Central -Station Air -Handling Units.
ARI 435 - Standard for Application of Central -Station Air -Handling Units.
C. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) Publications
NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.
D. Air moving and Control Association (AMCA) publications:
AMCA 301 - Method for Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices
1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver products to site in factory -fabricated protective containers, with factory -installed ship-
ping skids and lifting lugs.
B. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to
avoid damage to components, enclosures and finish. Replace damaged equipment,
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENIENCE MANUALS
A. Submit operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1.
B. Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, spare parts
lists, and wiring diagrams.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15763 - 2
SECTION 15763 — HYDRONIC AIR HANDLER
1.8 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow- �y
ing:
1. McQuay International
2. Approved equal
PART 2 — GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
2.1 DOUBLE WALL UNIT CONSTRUCTION
The outside casing consists of G90 galvanized steel 16 gauge nominal.
The casing leakage rate will not exceed .5 cfm per square foot of cabinet area at 5" static pres-
sure ( .0025 m3/s per square meter of cabinet area at 1.24 kPa static pressure ).
Module to module assembly is accomplished with an overlapping, full perimeter internal splice
joint that is sealed with bulb type gasketing on both mating modules to minimize on -site labor
along with meeting indoor air quality standards.
Access doors are double wall and constructed of galvanized steel, flush mounted to the cabi-
netry, and provided with gasketed seal. Heavy duty stainless steel hinges, door latch and full
size handle assembly are factory installed.
2 inch thick, 3 lb. per ft3 density, neoprene coated, glass fiber insulation.
The inner liner is constructed of 20 gauge nominal G90 galvanized steel solid.
Formed galvanized steel base rail, minimum height of 6" high. The base rail is an integral part
of each shipping section..
2.2 DRAIN PAN
Drain pan is constructed from stainless steel, cross broken and pitched (double sloped) to the
drain connection. The drain pan is provided with stainless steel construction without a coating.
The drain connection center line is a minimum of 3" ( 76 mm ) above finished floor for proper
trapping.
2.3 FANS
A. Provide supply fan section with centrifugal fan designed and suitable for class of service indi-
cated in the unit schedule. Fan shaft to be properly sized and protectively coated with lubricat-
ing oil. Fan shafts shall be solid and properly designed so that fan shaft does not pass through
first critical speed as unit comes up to rated RPM. Fans shall be statically and dynamically
tested as an assembly at the required RPM to meet design specifications. Fan wheel shall be
properly secured to shaft to prevent slippage.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15763 - 3.
SECTION 15763 — HYDRONIC AIR HANDLER
B. Provide self -aligning, grease lubricated pillow -block ball or roller bearings with lubrication fit-
tings. Provide extended grease lines to drive side of unit casing, for all fan bearings, rigidly at-
tached for easy service access. If extended grease lines are not provided, unit shall include an
opposite drive side access door and service room must be allowed on the opposite side of the
unit to perform regular maintenance. All bearings shall perform to L-50 200,000 hour average
life.
C. Fan shall be internally isolated with V spring vibration isolators.
D. Fan and fan motors shall be rated for use with a variable frequency drive where applicable.
2.4 MOTORS AND DRIVES
A. Fan motors shall be mounted and isolated on the same integral base as the fan.
B. Fan motors shall be heavy-duty open drip -proof, designed for use with variable frequency
drives where applicable.
C. Bearings: ANSI/AFBMA 9, L-50 life at 200,000 hours, heavy duty pillow block or flange
type, self -aligning, grease -lubricated ball bearings, or ANSI/AFBMA 11, L-10 life at 120,000
hours pillow block type, self -aligning, grease -lubricated roller bearings.
D. Shafts: Solid hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key -way, and protectively coated with
an lubricating oil. Select shafts such that they do not pass through their first critical speed as the
unit comes up to rated rpm.
- E. V-Belt Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed.
Provide fixed sheave for motors equipped with variable frequency drives and all motors 20 hp
and over. Provide belts that are matched belts and drive rated for a minimum one and one-half
times nameplate rating of the motor. Include one additional set of drives for final adjustments.
G. Belt Guard: Provide belt guard for all belts whether internal or external to the unit. Fabricate to
SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards; of 12 gage, 3/4" diamond mesh wire
screen welded to settle angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports
without short circuiting vibration isolation, with provision for adjustment of belt tension, lubri-
cation, and use of tachometer with guard in place.
2.4 COILS
..
A. Cooling coils shall be manufactured by the same company as the supplier of the air handling
unit. Coils shall be designed with aluminum plate fins and copper tubes, maximum ten fins per
inch.
B. Fins shall have collars drawn, belted and firmly bonded to the tubes by means of mechanical
expansion of the tubes. Coils shall be mounted in the unit casing to be accessible for service
and can be removed from the unit either through the side or top. Capacities, pressure drops and
selection procedure shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410.
C. Provide factory installed extended drain and vent connections for water coils.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15763 - 4
SECTION 15763 — HYDRONIC AIR HANDLER
D. Water Cooling and Heating Coils
1. All coils shall be enclosed in an insulated coil section. Coil headers and U-bends
shall not be exposed.
2. Coils shall be drawable.
3. Water flow shall be counter to airflow.
4. Coils shall be tested at the factory under water at 300 psig and shall be suitable for
200 psig working pressure.
5. Headers shall be seamless copper tube with silver brazed joints or cast iron.
6. Tubes shall be 1/2" OD, .016" thick.
7. Each coil or set of coils shall be provided with a 3-way control valve. The coils and
control valve shall be pre -piped and ready for connection to the chilled water system.
2.5 FILTER
A. Provide filter box of steel similar to casing construction with filter guides, access doors from
both sides, for side loading and permanent filter frames.
B. Provide flat, angle, or high capacity arrangement with 65% efficient filters.
C. Provide filters that are UL listed with Class II rating. Provide two spare filter sets for each air
handler.
2.6 MIXING BOX
A. Provide mixing box with factory outside and return air openings and motorized control damp-
ers. The motorized dampers shall have a variable actuator with control interface.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Assemble units by bolting sections together. All joints and connections shall be fully gasketed
and made air tight/weather tight.
C. Install filters.
D. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters
are in place, bearings lubricated and fan has been test run under observation.
E. Refer to Section 15992, "TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING."
***END OF SECTION***
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15763 - 5 —
SECTION 15900 — DDC CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of electronic direct digital control (DDC) temperature control system work is indicated by
drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section.
B. Control sequences are specified in the construction documents M5.1 and M5.2.
40 C. Control wiring necessary for temperature control systems is work of this section. All power wiring
shall be by others.
D. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary for a complete and operating
temperature control system, utilizing a high speed peer to peer network of interoperable Direct
Digital Controls (DDC), Graphical User Interface (GUI) with color graphic displays available on
an least 64 client computers, and electronic interfaces and actuation devices, as shown on the
drawings and as described herein. The Local Area Network (LAN) shall be either a 10 or 100
Mpbs Ethernet network supporting BACnet, Java, XML, HTTP, and CORBA IIOP for maximum
flexibility for integration of building data with enterprise information systems and Web Based
Interface and providing support for multiple Universal Network Controllers (UNCs), user
workstations and a local host computer system. The Enterprise Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) LAN shall
utilize Carrier Sense Multiple/Access/Collision Detect (CSMA/CD), Address Resolution Protocol
(ARP) and User Datagram Protocol (UDP) operating at 10 or 100 Mbps.
E. The system will consist of an open architecture that utilizes EIA standard 709.1, the LonTalkTM
protocol, as the common communication protocol between all controllers and integral ANSI /
ASHRAETM Standard 135-1995, BACnet functionality to assure interoperability between all
system components. Both the LonTalkTM protocol and the ANSI / ASHRAETM Standard 135-
1995, BACnet protocol are required to assure that the project is fully supported by the two leading
HVAC open protocols to reduce future building maintenance, upgrade, and expansion costs.
Where necessary or desired, LonTalkTM packets may be encapsulated into TCP/IP messages to
take advantage of existing infrastructure or to increase network bandwidth. Any such
encapsulation of the LonTalkTM protocol into IP datagrams shall conform to existing LonMarkTM
guidelines for such encapsulation and shall be based on industry standard protocols. The products
used in constructing the BMS shall be LonMarkTM compliant. In those instances in which
LonMarkTM devices are not available, the BMS contractor shall provide LonWorksTM devices with
application source code, device resource files, and external interface definitions. The software tools
required to network manage both the LonTalkTM protocol and the ANSI / ASHRAETM Standard
135-1995, BACnet protocol must be provided with the system. Drawings are diagrammatic only.
Equipment and labor not specifically referred to herein or on the plans, that are required to meet
the functional intent, shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner. Minimum BACnet
compliance is Level 3; with the ability to support data read and write functionality. Physical
connection of BACnet devices shall be via Ethemet/Ethemet IP.
F. Complete temperature control system to be DDC with electronic sensors and electronic actuation
of Mechanical Equipment Room (MER) valves and dampers and electronic actuation of terminal
equipment valves and actuators as specified herein. The BMS is intended to seamlessly connect
devices throughout the building regardless of subsystem type, i.e. variable frequency drives, low
voltage lighting systems, electrical circuit breakers, power metering and card access should easily
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15900 - 1
SECTION 15900 — DDC CONTROL SYSTEMS
coexist on the same network channel. The supplied system must incorporate the ability to access all
data using Java enabled browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and
configuration programs. An Open DataBase Connectivity (ODBC) or Structured Query Language
(SQL) compliant server database is required for all system database parameter storage. This data
shall reside on a supplier -installed server for all database access. Systems requiring proprietary
database and user interface programs shall not be acceptable. A hierarchical topology is required to
assure reasonable system response times and to manage the flow and sharing of data without
unduly burdening the customer's internal Intranet network. Systems employing a "flat" single
tiered architecture shall not be acceptable.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and -
Division-1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Refer to Division-15 sections for related work, including Basic Mechanical Materials and a.
Methods, apply to this section.
C. Refer to Division-16 sections for power wiring to line voltage devices; not work of this section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards
Temperature Control System: Direct digital control (DDC)/electronic, which meets in every
respect all operational and quality standards specified herein; installed, wired, circuit tested
and calibrated by factory certified technicians qualified for this work and in the regular
employment of the temperature control system manufacturer's field office. The local installing
office shall have a minimum of five years of installation experience with the manufacturer and ,
shall provide documentation in the bid and submittal package verifying longevity of the
installing company's relationship with the manufacturer. Supervision, calibration and checkout
of the system shall be by the employees of the local temperature control contracting field
office. Supplier shall have an in place support facility within 50 miles of the site with
technical staff, spare parts inventory and all necessary test and diagnostic equipment. The
manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified.
2. The temperature control contractor shall be a single source responsibility control system
provider for the product, installation and technical services. Wholesalers and/or distributors in
combination with dealer/contractors are not acceptable and will not be approved.
3. System: Composed of standard products of the manufacturer to insure ongoing parts
availability and trained technical support. Units installed for the same purpose (i.e., control of ,..
an air handling unit) shall be products of a single manufacturer. Each major component of
equipment shall have the manufacturer's name and address, and the model and serial number,
in a conspicuous place. All materials and equipment shall be currently in production. No
mixing of suppliers will be permitted without prior confirmation of acceptability in writing.
4. Temperature Control Contractor shall furnish proof, if requested, of having factory -trained
servicemen available to handle service calls within four (4) hours of notification and of having`
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15900 - 2
..
EM
SECTION 15900 — DDC CONTROL SYSTEMS
an installation of equal or greater size and complexity to this installation in a radius of 50 miles
of this project. Twenty-four (24) hour service capability, 365 days per year, shall be required.
5. The Building Management System contractor shall have a full service facility that is staffed
with engineers trained in Integrating Interoperable Systems and technicians fully capable of
providing LonWorks instructions and routine emergency maintenance service on all system
components.
B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electronic Direct Digital
Control (DDC), electric and pneumatic control equipment, of types and sizes required, and whose
products have been satisfactory in use in similar service for not less than five years.
1. Mechanical equipment manufacturers desiring to provide DDC type controls as factory
mounted equipment, shall provide a separate bid for their products less all controls, actuators,
valve assemblies and sensors, which are specified to be provided by the BMS contractor.
C. Codes and Standards
1. All work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of all codes
and ordinances of the local and state, and federal authorities. Such codes, when more
restrictive, shall take precedence over these plans and specifications. As a minimum, the
installation shall comply with current editions in effect 90 days prior to receipt of bids of
the following codes. All products of the DDC system shall be provided with the following
agency approvals. With the submittal documents, verification that the approvals exist for
all submitted products shall be provided. Systems or products not currently offering the
following approvals are not acceptable
2. Electrical Standards: Provide electrical components of DDC control systems
which have been UL listed and labeled, UL 916, 294, 1950, 864 and comply
with NEMA and LONMARke and ULC standards. Installation shall comply
with NEC (National Electric Code, latest edition).
3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" where applicable to controls and control sequences.
4. Comply with FCC Part 15, subpart J, Class B Testing.
5. All products shall be labeled with the appropriate approval markings. System installation shall
comply with NFPA 70, Article 100; NEMA, Local and National codes.
6. The DDC System manufacturer shall provide documentation supporting compliance with ISO
9000 certification mark from applicable registrar
7. Comply with EIA Standard 709.1 LONTALO protocol for DDC system control components
and shall be so labeled
D. The following work shall be furnished under this section of the work:
l IAiI IEC101D
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS QQ g
SECTION 15900 — DDC CONTROL SYSTEMS
1. All control wiring to devices furnished as part of the Temperature Control Contract, including
control transformers.
2. All control wiring, including control transformers, for air handling systems.
3. All electrical interlocks incidental to the Temperature Control System.
4. All other wiring, including all power wiring, shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor.
5. All electrical work shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of Division 16 of
these Specifications.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each control device furnished,
indicated dimensions, capacities, performance and electrical characteristics, and material finishes,
also include installation and start-up instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each DDC control system, containing the following
information:
1. Schematic flow diagram of system showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control
devices. Show label of each control device with setting or adjustable range of control."
2. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are
factory -installed and portions to be field -installed.
3. Provide details of faces of control panels, including controls, instruments and labeling.
4. Include written description of sequence of operation.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions and spare parts lists for each type of control
device, and compressed air station. Include that type data, product data and shop drawings in
maintenance manual in accordance with requirements of Division 15.
1.5 SYSTEM START-UP AND ACCEPTANCE
A. Upon completion of the installation, the DDC Control System Contractor shall start-up the system
and perform all necessary testing in conformance with the test plan described in this section. An
acceptance test is the presence of the Owner's representative, the Architect, and the Engineer shall
be performed. Final acceptance, in writing, from the Owner on any given phase will commence the
warranty period on that phase.
1.6 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. The DDC Control System Contractor shall provide two copies of an operator's manual describing
all operating and routine maintenance service procedures to be used with the system. The
ontractor shall instruct the Owner's designated representatives in these procedures during the
tart -up and test period. The instructions are to be conducted during normal working hours. The -
P
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15900 - 4
rM
SECTION 15900 — DDC CONTROL SYSTEMS
instruction shall consist of both hands-on and classroom training at the job site. Additional
training shall be available upon the request of the Owner at a negotiated hourly rate.
1. Provide 40 hours of Owner training and instruction.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. The system, including all hardware and software components, shall be warranted for a period of
one (1) year following the date of acceptance. Any manufacturing defects arising during this
warranty period shall be corrected without cost to the Owner.
B. All applicable software as detailed in this specification shall be updated by the DDC Control
System Contractor free of charge during the warranty period. This will ensure that all system
software will be the most up-to-date software from the DDC Control System Manufacturer.
1.8 OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL
A. The owner shall sign a copy of the manufacturer's standard software and firmware licensing
agreement as a condition of this contract. Such license shall grant use of all programs and application
software to owner as defined by the manufacturer's license agreement, but shall protect
manufacturer's rights to disclosure of trade secrets contained within such software. All project
developed software and documentation shall become the property of the owner. These include, but are
not limited to project graphic images, record drawings, project database, project specific application
programming code, and all other associated documentation.
1.9 MANUFACTURERS I INSTALLERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers/Installers:
1. Johnson Controls
2. Control Technologies, Inc
3. Cohesive Automation
am 4. TAC Americas
5. Others by written approval
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
A. The Direct Digital Control System or Facility Management System (FMS) shall be capable of
integrating multiple building functions, including equipment supervision and control, alarm
management, energy management, and trend data collection.
B. The contractor shall AM provide an open, interoperable peer -to -peer networked, distributed control
system using ANSUEIA Standard 709. 1 -A- 1999, LONWORKS® technology communication
protocols. The system shall consist of LONWOROD- based microprocessor -based controllers, plus
instrumentation, control valves, dampers, operators, control devices, interface equipment, laptop
computer, operator workstation(s), LONWORKS® routers, LONWORKS® communication interfaces,
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15900 - 5
SECTION 15900 — DDC CONTROL SYSTEMS
and other apparatus required to operate building systems and perform functions specified. The
system shall provide total integration of the facility infrastructure systems with user access to all
system data via operator workstations connected to the system network at the Ethernet level.
C. The supplied computer software shall employ object -oriented technology (OOT) for representing
all data and control devices within the system. Adherence to industry standards ANSIIEIA
Standard 709. 1 -A- 1999, LONWORKe to assure interoperability between all system components is
required. For each LONWORKSm device that does not have LONMARO certification, the device
supplier must provide an XIF file for the device if it is application specific and the XIF file and
application file if the device is programmable.
D. Workstation Client Hardware Stations: The system shall be capable of supporting at least 64
clients (minimum of 16 simultaneous users) using a standard Web browser such as Internet
ExplorerTM operating on any standard computer that supports the current version of Internet
ExplorerTM .
E. The DDC Control System shall consist of the following:
a. Programmable Control Units interfaced to primary HVAC systems.
b. Application Specific Control Units interfaced to terminal HVAC equipment.
c. Color Graphic Presentation Software and Developed HVAC Graphics
d. Portable Operator's Terminal
F. The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of
control strategies at other operational devices.
2.2 NETWORKING,'` COMMUNICATIONS
A. The system architecture shall support the following levels.
1. 78kbyte FTT 10 channels for operating nodes
2. 1.25 mB high speed bus to tie together multiple 78kbyte FTT 10 channels
3. IP (via network interface card, or a LTA card & Lon to IP adaptor)
4. Modem to FTT10 for remote sites.
5. PC -to -PC Dial using Microsofte Remote Access Services (RAS).
6. Access to a system workstation over IP via standard web browser.
B. Local area network minimum physical and media access requirements:
1. Ethernet; IEEE standard 802.3.
2. Cable; 10 Base-T, UTP-8 wire, category 5.
3. Minimum throughput; 10 Mbps, with ability to increase to 100 Mbps.
2.3 NETWORK ACCESS
A. Remote Access to Installations on the Owner's Intranet:
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15900 - 6
SECTION 15900 — DDC CONTROL SYSTEMS
1. The owner shall provide the IP address(s) for remote access by the contractor to the control system
via the Internet.
2. The DDC System contractor shall provide bridges, routers and hubs required for interface to the
owners Intranet and access to the IP address via the Internet.
2.4 PROGRAMMABLE NODES (CONTROLLERS)
A. Control Units General:
Provide an adequate number of control units to achieve monitoring and control of all data points
specified and necessary to satisfy the sequence of operation for all mechanical systems shown on the
plans. Provide a minimum of one separate controller for each AHU or other HVAC system. Multiple
DDC controllers may control one system provided that all points associated with individual control
loops are assigned to the same DDC controller. Points used for control loop reset such as outside air
or space temperature are exempt from this requirement. Each of the following panel types shall meet
the following requirements.
1. Controllers shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.
a. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted within
waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at (-40°C to 60°C}[-40°F to
140°F] and 5 to 95% RH, non condensing.
b. Controllers used in conditioned ambient space shall be mounted in dust -proof
enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at (0°C to 50°C)[32°F to 122°F] and 5 to
95% RH, non condensing.
3. Serviceability: Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. All wiring
connections shall be made to field -removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card
connected by a ribbon cable.
4. Memory: The Control Units shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of
a power loss for at least 72 hours.
5. Diagnostics: The Building Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and
memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall assume a predetermined
failure mode and generate an alarm notification.
6. Immunity to power and noise: Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal
voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage. Operation shall
be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at (1 m)[3
ft]
7. Automatic staggered restart of field equipment after restoration of power and short cycle
protection.
B. Universal Network Controllers (UNC)
1. The Universal Network Controllers (UNC) shall provide the interface between the LAN or
WAN and the field control devices, and provide global supervisory control functions over the
control devices connected to the UNC. It shall be capable of executing application control
programs to provide:
a. Calendar functions
b. Scheduling
C. Trending
d. Alarm monitoring and routing
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15900 - 7
SECTION 15900 — DDC CONTROL SYSTEMS
e. Time synchronization by means of an Atomic Clock Internet site including automatic
synchronization
f. Integration of LonWorks controller data and BACnet controller data
g. Network Management functions for all LonWorks based devices
2. The Universal Network Controllers must provide the following hardware features as a
minimum:
a. One Ethernet Port — 10/100 Mbps
b. One RS-232 port
C. One LonWorks Interface Port — 78KB FTT- l0A
d. Battery Backup
e. Flash memory for long term data backup (If battery backup or flash memory is not
supplied, the controller must contain a hard disk with at least l gigabyte storage
capacity)
3. The UNC shall provide multiple user access to the system and support for ODBC or SQL. A
database resident on the UNC shall be an ODBC compliant database or must provide an -
ODBC data access mechanism to read and write data stored within it.
4. The UNC shall support standard Web browser access via the Intranet/Internet. It shall support
a minimum of 16 simultaneous users. -
5. Event Alarm Notification and actions
a. The UNC shall provide alarm recognition, storage; routing, management, and analysis
to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers.
b. The UNC shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location
whether connected to a local network or remote via dial -up telephone connection, or
wide -area network.
C. Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement
requirements including but limited to:
1) To alarm
2) Return to normal
3) To fault
d. Provide for the creation of a minimum of eight of alarm classes for the purpose of
routing types and or classes of alarms, i.e.: security, HVAC, Fire, etc.
e. Provide timed (schedule) routing of alarms by class, object, group, or node.
f. Provide alarm generation from binary object "runtime" and /or event counts for
equipment maintenance. The user shall be able to reset runtime or event count values
with appropriate password control.
g. Control equipment and network failures shall be treated as alarms and annunciated.
h. Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the user:
1) Screen message text
2) Email of the complete alarm message to multiple recipients. Provide the ability to
route and email alarms based on:
a) Day of week
b) Time of day ,
c) Recipient
i. Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt of email message
j. Graphic with flashing alarm object(s)
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15900 - 8
so
SECTION 15900 — DDC CONTROL SYSTEMS
k.
Printed message, routed directly to a dedicated alarm printer
1.
The following shall be recorded by the UNC for each alarm (at a minimum):
1) Time and date
2) Location (building, floor, zone, office number, etc.)
3) Equipment (air handler #, accessway, etc.)
4) Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement.
5) Number of occurrences since last acknowledgement.
in.
Alarm actions may be initiated by user defined programmable objects created for that
purpose.
n.
Defined users shall be given proper access to acknowledge any alarm, or specific types
or classes of alarms defined by the user.
o.
A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the UNC and/or a server (if configured in the
system) and shall be available for review by the user.
p.
Provide a "query" feature to allow review of specific alarms by user defined parameters.
q.
A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network failures, etc.) shall be
provided and available for review by the user.
r.
An Error Log to record invalid property changes or commands shall be provided and
available for review by the user.
6. Data Collection and Storage
a.
The UNC shall have the ability to collect data for any property of any object and store
this data for future use.
b.
The data collection shall be performed by log objects, resident in the UNC that shall
have, at a minimum, the following configurable properties:
1) Designating the log as interval or deviation.
2) For interval logs, the object shall be configured for time of day, day of week and
the sample collection interval.
3) For deviation logs, the object shall be configured for the deviation of a variable to
a fixed value. This value, when reached, will initiate logging of the object.
4) For all logs, provide the ability to set the maximum number of data stores for the
.,�
log and to set whether the log will stop collecting when full, or rollover the data
on a first -in, first -out basis.
5) Each log shall have the ability to have its data cleared on a time -based event or by
a user -defined event or action.
7. All log data shall be stored in a relational database in the UNC and the data shall be accessed
from a server (if the system is so configured) or a standard Web Browser.
8. All log data, when accessed from a server, shall be capable of being manipulated using
standard SQL statements.
9. All log data shall be available to the user in the following data formats:
1) HTML
2) XML
3) Plain Text
4) Comma or tab separated values
10. Systems that do not provide log data in HTML and XML formats at a minimum shall provide
as an alternative Microsoft SQL Server@, Oracle 8i or Express@, Hyperion SolutionsTM SQL
Server.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 14006-="9'•- 11�-2`J
�.�p,fC"
SECTION 15900 — DDC CONTROL SYSTEMS
l l . The UNC shall have the ability to archive it's log data either locally (to itself), or remotely to a
server or other UNC on the network. Provide the ability to configure the following archiving
properties, at a minimum:
1) Archive on time of day
2) Archive on user -defined number of data stores in the log (buffer size)
3) Archive when log has reached it's user -defined capacity of data stores
4) Provide ability to clear logs once archived
12. AUDIT LOG
a. Provide and maintain an Audit Log that tracks all activities performed on the UNC.
Provide the ability to specify a buffer size for the log and the ability to archive log based
on time or when the log has reached it's user -defined buffer size. Provide the ability to
archive the log locally (to the UNC), to another UNC on the network, or to a server.
For each log entry, provide the following data:
1) Time and date
2) User ID
3) Change or activity: i.e., Change setpoint, add or delete objects, commands, etc.
13. DATABASE BACKUP AND STORAGE
a. The UNC shall have the ability to automatically backup its database. The database
shall be backed up based on a user -defined time interval.
b. Copies of the current database and, at the most recently saved database shall be stored
in the UNC. The age of the most recently saved database is dependent on the user -
defined database save interval.
C. The UNC database shall be stored, at a minimum, in XML format to allow for user
viewing and editing, if desired. Other formats are acceptable as well, as long as XML
format is supported.
C. Custom Application Control Units:
Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, RAM/EEPROM memory for
custom control applications. CAC's shall be provided for Roof Top Units, Boiler Plant, Chiller Plant
and other applications as shown on drawings and shall have published LonWorksTm application
source code, device resource files and external interface definitions
1. Units monitor or control each input/output point; process information; and at least 50
expressions for customized HVAC control including mathematical equations, boolean logic,
PID control loops with anti -windup, sequencers, timers, interlocks, thermostats, enthalpy
calculation, counters, interlocks, ramps, drivers, schedules, calendars, OSS, compare, limit, -•.
curve fit, and alarms.
2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include
the following: _.
a. Peer to peer primary network level communications supporting at least 200 LonMarkTM
Standard Network Variables (SNVTs) per CAC utilizing at least 100 different SNVT
types as documented by the LonMarkTM Interoperability Association to assure present
and future compatibility with third party LonMarkTM devices. The 200 LonMarkTM
SNVTs, minimum, must be configurable in any combination — all inputs or all outputs
or any combination of input/outputs in any combination of the 100 different, minimum,
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM -- HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15900 - 10
a ._
SECTION 15900 — DDC CONTROL SYSTEMS
SNVT types. The XIF SNVT order shall be definable, rather than random, to provide
logical and effective LonMarkTM network management. With the submittal package,
contractor shall provide CAC performance data that specifies the exact maximum
number of SNVTs available in any combination and a list of all available SNVT types
including the LonMarkTm Interoperability Association SNVT number.
b. Automatic communications loss detection to maintain normal control functionality
regardless of available network communications.
C. Discrete(digital, analog, and pulse input/outputs.
d. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
e. Local energy management control strategies
f. Incorporate internal customizable safeties and limits to prevent third party LonMarkTM
tools from providing improper and unrealistic inputs to CAC `s.
3. Local operator interface port provides for download from and connection to portable
workstation.
4. Communication: The Custom Application Controller shall communicate via the Primary
Controller Network between BMS Controllers and other LonWorksTm devices. CAC's shall
communicate with the Building Controller and ASC's at a baud rate of not less than 78.8K
baud using LonTalkTM communications protocol (EIA 709.1).
2.5 PORTABLE OPERATOR'S TERMINAL
A. Provide a local operator interface device with touch screen display and keypad that resides on the
DDC controller LAN and operates "on-line" and interactive with all DDC system points on a real-
time basis. As a minimum, unit shall have (4) levels of password protections, 32 KB EPROM,
no 256KB RAM, 512KB NOVRAM with 300 hours of battery back-up and support (2) external
RS232 communications ports.
B. Operator interface shall use self -prompting menus and smart function keys to provide viewing of
Za all points' current status and alarms, adjusting and changing of all DDC system setpoints, override
of time schedules, historical data reports, and editing of all DDC controller programs.
C. Unit shall be housed in an impact resistant enclosure with all power and communication's
connections via plug-in connections to LPN or LSPN controllers and the display and keypad
exposed.
2.6 ALL APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROL UNITS
A. Single board construction comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile,
RAM/EEPROM memory for custom control and unitary applications. ASCs shall be provided for
Unit Ventilators, Fan Coils, Heat Pumps, VAV Terminal Boxes, Rooftop Units and other
`- applications as shown on the drawings. To assure complete interoperability, all ASCs firmware shall
support all mandatory and all optional LonMarkTM Standard Network Variables (SNVTs) for their
LonMarkTM profile as documented by the LonMarkTM Interoperability Association. Bidder shall
provide proof of ASC compliance for all the mandatory and all optional LonMarkTM SNVTs. ASCs
shall be based on the Echelon Neuron 3150 microprocessor working with the ASCs stand alone
control program.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15900 - 11
SECTION 15900 — DDC CONTROL SYSTEMS
1. Units monitor or control each input/output point; process information; and download from
the operator station.
2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions
include the following:
a. Peer to peer primary network level communications with automatic
communications loss detection to maintain normal control functionality
regardless of available network communications.
b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse input/output.
c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
d. Appropriate LonMarkTM profiles for specific unitary applications.
e. Support for all mandatory and optional LonMarkTM Standard Network Variable
Types (SNVTs) for their LonMarkTM profile as documented by the LonMarkTM
Interoperability Association
f. Internal customizable safeties and limits to prevent third party LonMarkTM tools
from providing improper and unrealistic inputs to ASC's.
3. Local operator interface port located on ASC and ASC sensor provides for download from.
or upload to portable workstation. All Lon bus devices shall be accessible from either
port.
4. Communication: ASC's shall communicate with the Building Controller and CAC's at a
baud rate of not less than 78.8K baud using LonTalkTM communications protocol (EIA
709.1). -
5. ASC units monitor or control each input/output point; process information; and at least 50
expressions for customized RVAC control including mathematical equations, boolean
logic, PID control loops with anti -windup, sequencers, timers, interlocks, thermostats,
counters, interlocks, compare, limit, and alarms.
6. All ASC Controller setpoints shall be digital display setpoints with dual setpoint limits
(integral hard limits which the user cannot exceed above and below and independent soft
limits which are hidden from the user). All digital setpoints shall be network retentive after
power outages and after replacement of sensor.
2.7 SYSTEM SOFTWARE FEATURES
A. General
1. All necessary software to form a complete operating system, as described in this specification,
shall be provided. -�
2. The software programs specified in this section shall be provided as an integral part of the
Digital Panel, and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution.
3. This Contractor shall provide all software required for efficient operation of the automatic
system functions required by this specification. Software shall be modular in design for
flexibility in expansion or revision of the system. It is the intent of this specification to require
provisions of a system which can be fully utilized by individuals with no, or limited, previous
exposure to PC's and programming techniques and languages. If the system to be provided
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — RVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15900 - 12
SECTION 15900 — DDC CONTROL SYSTEMS
requires the use of any modified BASIC, "C", PASCAL, or DRUM Language program, or
writing "line" programming statements to modify operation or strategy in the system, the
vendor shall provide unlimited, no charge, software modification and support for a period of
five (5) years after the completion of the project in addition to the warranty period specified
elsewhere. Systems which are factory programmed are unacceptable.
4. The software in the system shall consist of both "firmware" resident in the direct digital
controllers and "software" resident in the operator workstations. The architecture of the
system, and the application software/firmware shall be distributed with no single system
component responsible for a control function for the entire Primary LAN. Each Direct Digital
Control unit shall contain the necessary firmware and VO capability to function independently
in case of a network failure. No active energy management or environmental control sequences
shall be resident in the PC workstations. All PC workstations shall be removable from the
system without loss of control function - only alarm monitoring, long term history collection,
and operator monitor/command/edit functions would be lost.
B. GUI Server Application Software
Input/output capability from operator station for monitoring and controlling all of the points
listed in the input/output point list. The operator shall be able to monitor and access all points
by means of clear concise English names without having to understand or reference hardware
point locations or controller programs.
1. Operating System: The GUI shall run on Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0,
Service Pack 4, Windows 2000, or later.
2. The GUI shall employ browser -like functionality for ease of navigation. It shall include a
tree view (similar to Windows Explorer) for quick viewing of, and access to, the
- hierarchical structure of the database. In addition, menu -pull downs, and toolbars shall
employ buttons, commands and navigation to permit the operator to perform tasks with a
minimum knowledge of the HVAC Control System and basic computing skills. These
shall include, but are not limited to, forward/backward buttons, home button, and a context
sensitive locator line (similar to a URL line), that displays the location and the selected
object identification.
Real -Time Displays. The GUI, shall at a minimum, support the following graphical
features and functions:
a. Graphic screens shall be developed using any drawing package capable of
generating a GIF, BMP, or JPG file format. Use of proprietary graphic file formats
shall not be acceptable. In addition to, or in lieu of a graphic background, the
GUI shall support the use of scanned pictures.
a. Graphic screens shall have the capability to contain objects for text, real-time values,
animation, color spectrum objects, logs, graphs, HTML or XML document links,
schedule objects, hyperlinks to other URL's, and links to other graphic screens.
b. Graphics shall support layering and each graphic object shall be configurable for
assignment to one a layer. A minimum of six layers shall be supported.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15900 - 13
0
SECTION 15900 — DDC CONTROL SYSTEMS
C. Modifying common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points
shall be accomplished in a graphical manner.
1) Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring any
keyboard entry from the operator.
2) Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any
keyboard entry from the operator.
4. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right -clicking the selected
object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text
shall be required.
5. Adjustments to analog objects, such as set points, shall be done by right -clicking the -
selected object and using a graphical slider to adjust the value. No entry of text shall be
required.
6. System Configuration. At a minimum, the GUI shall permit the operator to perform the
following tasks, with proper password access:
a. Create, delete or modify control strategies.
b. Add/delete objects to the system.
c. Tune control loops through the adjustment of control loop
parameters.
d. Enable or disable control strategies.
e. Generate hard copy records or control strategies on a printer.
f. Select points to be alarmable and define the alarm state.
g. Select points to be trended over a period of time and initiate the
recording of values automatically.
7. On -Line Help. Provide a context sensitive, on-line help system to assist the operator ina,
operation and editing of the system. On-line help shall be available for all applications and
shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional help information shall
be available through the use of hypertext. All system documentation and help files shall be
in HTML format.'
8. Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to that system with a user name and
password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security shall be selectable for
each operator. The system administrator shall have the ability to set passwords and
security levels for all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict the
operators' access for viewing and/or changing each system application, full screen editor,
and object. Each operator shall automatically be logged off of the system if no keyboard
or mouse activity is detected. This auto log -off time shall be set per operator password.
All system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15900 - 14
SECTION 15900 — DDC CONTROL SYSTEMS
9. System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all
workstations, printers, modems, network connections, building management panels, and
controllers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator.
10. Alarm Console
a. The system will be provided with a dedicated alarm window or console. This
window will notify the operator of an alarm condition, and allow the operator to
view details of the alarm and acknowledge the alarm. The use of the Alarm
Console can be enabled or disabled by the system administrator.
b. When the Alarm Console is enabled, a separate alarm notification window will
supercede all other windows on the desktop and shall not be capable of being
minimized or closed by the operator. This window will notify the operator of new
alarms and un-acknowledged alarms. Alarm notification windows or banners that
can be minimized or closed by the operator shall not be acceptable.
C. Web Browser Clients
1. The system shall be capable of supporting at least 64 clients using a standard Web
browser such as Internet ExplorerTM or Netscape NavigatorTM. Systems requiring
additional software (to enable a standard Web browser) to be resident on the client
machine, are only acceptable if 64 licensed copies of the client machine software are
provided, installed, and tested.
2. The Web browser software shall run on any operating system and system configuration
that is supported by the Web browser. Systems that require specific machine requirements
in terms of processor speed, memory, etc., in order to allow the Web browser to function
with the FMCS, shall only be acceptable if 64 workstation or workstation hardware
upgrades are provided.
3. The Web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics,
schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is provided
by the Graphical User Interface. Systems that require different views or that require
different means of interacting with objects such as schedules, or logs, shall not be
permitted.
4. The Web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions:
a. User log -on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized user
attempts access, a blank web page shall be displayed. Security using Java
authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be
implemented.
b. Graphical screens developed for the GUI shall be the same screens used for the Web
browser client. Any animated graphical objects supported by the GUI shall be
supported by the Web browser interface.
c. HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on a Web
page. HTML editing of the Web page shall be allowed if the user desires a specific
look or format.
d. Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the Building Control Units (BC), without
requiring any graphics to be stored on the client machine. Systems that require
graphics storage on each client are not acceptable.
e. Real-time values displayed on a Web page shall update automatically without requiring
a manual "refresh" of the Web page.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS p6(Y
.m
SECTION 15900 — DDC CONTROL SYSTEMS
f. User's shall have administrator -defined access privileges. Depending on the access
privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following:
1) Modify common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points
in a graphical manner.
a) Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring
any keyboard entry from the operator.
b) Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any
keyboard entry from the operator.
2) Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right -clicking the �.
selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu.
No entry of text shall be required.
3) View logs and charts
4) View and acknowledge alarms
g. The system shall provide the capability to specify a user's (as determined by the log -on
user identification) home page. Provide the ability to limit a specific user to just their
defined home page. From the home page, links to other views, or pages in the system
shall be possible, if allowed by the system administrator.
h. Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to other
locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource
Locator (URL) for the desired link.
2.8 ROOM THERMOSTATS AND SENSORS
A. Unless otherwise noted and except for DDC Application Specific Controller's sensors, thermostats,
and temperature sensors located in conditioned spaces shall have blank, locking covers. Room
sensors for DDC Application Specific Controllers shall have no exposed adjustment with locking -
type flat -plate covers. Thermostats shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed under UL934 for use
in air plenum applications. Finish shall be manufacturers standard. All thermostat locations shall
be submitted for approval before installation. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, provide one
thermostat for each air handling mechanical system shown on the drawings. All thermostat
temperature ranges to comply with Section 503.8 "Controls", of the Indiana Energy Code.
B. Room thermostats and sensors shall be capable of being replaced without the need for controller re -
calibration. Room thermostats and sensors shall accordingly have manufactured space temperature
and setpoint signal precision tolerances of no greater than 1.0 DegF. DDC/FMS shall be able to
limit space sensor integral adjustment through software commands.
C. Electric Thermostats: incorporate bimetal sensing elements and snap -acting contacts rated for the
intended service to meet the intent of the control sequences as specified in this section.
D. Provide space thermostat and sensor guards where indicated on drawings.
2.9 ANALOG INPUT SENSORS
A. Analog sensing devices shall be available for the measurement of common variables such as
temperature, static pressure, differential pressure, humidity, fluid flow, etc. All devices shall be -
4 WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15900 - 16
yS
F
SECTION 15900 — DDC CONTROL SYSTEMS
standard manufactured for the purpose intended with an output range as specified. High
impedance resistive temperature elements shall not be acceptable to reduce transient noise and
voltage coupling and damage at the DDC controller.
B. All temperature measuring sensors shall have the capability of providing local indication at the
sensing location and specifically at those locations shown on the point chart.
C. When thermowells are required, sensor and well shall be supplied as a complete assembly including
well head Thermal conductive compound shall be used in sensor/well assembly.
D. Thermowells constructed as to be compatible with the medium being measured.
E. All thermowells and sensors mounted to allow easy access to the sensor for repair or replacement;
installed as part of the piping work.
F. Duct mount sensors mount through a hole in the duct and be positioned so as to be easily
accessible for repair or replacement. A seal shall be used on the sensor assembly to prevent air
leaks.
oft G. Outside air sensors designed to withstand the environmental conditions to which they will be
exposed; equipped with solar shields.
H. Accuracies: as follows, including errors associated with sensor, leadwire and A to D convertor.
Point Tvne
Accuracy
Outside Air Temperature
1.0 DegF
Chilled Water Temperature
1.0 DegF
Space Temperature
1.5 DegF
Hot Water Temperature
2.0 DegF
Duct Temperature
1.0 DegF
Sensors Used in Calibrations
0.5 DegF
2.10 ELECTRIC CONTROL WIRING
A. Provide control wiring without splices between terminal points, color -coded. All wiring shall be in
accordance with ANSVNFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."
B. Provide circuits over 25-volt with color -coded No. 12 THHN wire in electric metallic tubing.
C. Provide circuits under 25-volt with color -coded No. 18 THHN wire and 0.031" high temperature
plastic insulation on each conductor and plastic sheath overall.
D. Provide electronic circuits with color -coded twisted pair No. 18 wire with 0.023" polyethylene
insulation on each conductor with plastic jacketed copper shield overall. Shield shall be grounded
at a point separate from other voltages.
E. Provide all circuits in return air plenums and in exposed locations in electric metallic tubing. At
Contractor's option, under 25 volt in return air plenums may be run with plenum cable in
accordance with NEC 725.2 (b) and UL 910 latest edition.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15900 - 17
SECTION 15900 — DDC CONTROL SYSTEMS
L-�
2.11 CONTROL PANELS
A. Accommodate all controls and instruments (remote bulb thermostats, thermometers, switches,
relays, time switches, etc.), of each system; totally enclosed in a UL approved cabinet, factory
fabricated of steel or aluminum with Formica face panels„ equipped with piano hinged locking -
type front door; single cabinet or group of cabinets at one location for all controls for each system.
B. Identify system function of each piece of equipment with engraved laminated plastic nameplates.
C. Color coded laminated plastic graphic display of each system control schematic shall be provided
on, or incorporated in, panel faceplate.
D. Size and location of panels will be determined by fabrication technique and quantity and size of
equipment furnished.
E. Install all control devices in cabinets, except room type instruments and equipment mounted
devices (automatic dampers, valves, etc.).
F. Flush mount thermometers, pneumatic and electric switches, pilot lights, etc., on face of cabinet
door, with nameplates on each.
G. Thermostat and Thermometer Capillaries: of sufficient length to be installed between panels and
sensing points.
2.12 RELAYS
A. Electric.
1. Snap -acting, enclosed switching type, with built-in 120V to 24V/60 Hz transformer, 24V coil,
and line voltage contacts as indicated, each rated minimum 7.4 amp running current at
120VAC.
2. Snap -acting NEMA 1 enclosed switching type with 120V/60 Hz coil and line voltage contacts,
as indicated, each rated minimum 7.2 amp running current t 120VAC.
3. Snap -acting, rated for application, minimum 2 sets of Form C contacts, enclosed in dust -proof
enclosure.
a. Contacts: Silver-cadium with minimum life span rating of 1,000,000 operations.
b. Operating time: 20 milliseconds or less.
c. Release time: 10 milliseconds or less.
d. All relays equipped with coil transient suppression devices to limit transients to non -
damaging levels.
2.13 CURRENT SENSING RELAYS
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15900 - 18
SECTION 15900 — DDC CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Sensing relay shall be a solid state electronic device with split -core design to eliminate the need to
remove power conductor for installation or servicing.
B. Amperage rating of 0 - 135 Amps.
C. Trip setpoint shall be adjustable to + 1% of range. Provide a trip LED.
D. Sensor supply current is induced from monitored conductor. Minimum conductor current required
m` is 2 Amps. Provide a power LED to indicate that power is available at the current sensing relay.
"k
E. Sensor shall have 600 VAC rms isolation.
F. Switch output contacts shall be rated for 0.5 Amps @ 30 VAC/DC-
G. Switch shall be Nellsen - Kuljian SC-250, Veis Hawkeye 908 or approved equal.
2.14 ELECTRONIC PRESSURE SENSORS
A. Provide pressure sensors and other pressure -indicating sensors of commercial grade quality located
at the point of measurement and installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Provide pressure sensors of the direct acting or reverse acting, unidirectional or bi-directional type
such that the DDC panel shall be able to convert the 0 to 5 volts DC input signal available from
so the sensor into a digital signal for use by the DDC panel.
C. Provide pressure sensors utilizing the smallest possible operating range which will sufficiently
cover the range required for normal operating conditions.
D. Provide pressure sensors of the ultra precision type with a tolerance at midpoint of no greater than
+ .8% of full scale and an end -to -end (full scale) accuracy of + 2% of full scale.
E. All field -mounted sensors shall be labeled as to their function and name used in the DDC program.
° 2.15 AIR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES
A. Shall be differential pressure type with adjustable range from .05 to 1.0 inches water gauge.
Contacts shall be snap -acting SPDT and rated for 10 Amps (non -inductive) 120 VAC.
2.16 LOW TEMPERATURE DETECTION SAFETY THERMOSTATS
A. Manual reset, line voltage, with 20 ft. flexible sensing elements, responsive to lowest temperature
along entire length. Furnish two (2) thermostats wired in series, each set at 35 DegF with sensing
elements laced across coil discharge of each unit introducing outdoor air.
2.18 MISCELLANEOUS CONTROL DEVICES AND SENSORS
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15900 - 19
SECTION 15900 — DDC CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Water -Flow Switches: Pressure -flow switches of bellows -actuated mercury or snap -acting type,
with appropriate scale range and differential adjustment, with stainless -steel or bronze paddle. For
chilled -water applications, provide vapor proof type.
B. Refrigerant Detectors: Dual -level detectors, using solid-state sensors, with alarm preset for 300
ppm, alarm indicator light, alarm silence light and button, alarm test light and button, and trouble
light. Provide auxiliary relay preset for 150 ppm.
C. Occupancy Sensor: Passive infrared, with time delay, daylight sensor lockout, sensitivity control,
and 180-degree field of view with vertical sensing adjustment, for flush mounting.
2.19 DAMPERS
A. Damper Construction: incorporate blades equipped with steel shafts and operating in bearings in
damper frame, arranged so that all linkages are encased in side channels of frame to decrease
friction and eliminate air noise.
1. Frames: 16 gauge ( minimum) galvanized steel.
2. Blades: Aluminum Airfoil type equal to Ruskin CD40
3. Bearings: nylon, equipped with oil impregnated sintered iron bushings.
4. Seals: installed on all blade edges and frame top and bottom, synthetic elastomer; installed for
blade ends, stainless steel.
B. Damper Design: provide for tight shut-off, arranged so that leakage does not exceed 1 % at a 4"'
w.g. pressure differential when delivering scheduled system volume.
C. All Dampers for Modulating Control: proportioning type with adjacent blades rotating in
opposites directions.
D. All Dampers for Two Position Action: have blades arranged for parallel rotation.
2.20 DAMPER AND VALVE ACTUATORS
A. Actuators shall be direct coupled, brushless DC motor type which require no crank arm and
linkage. The actuator shall provide 0 - 10 VDC, 0 - 2 V phased cut or 4 - 20 mA proportional
control or two position control or pulse width modulation or Tri-State control as dictated by
HVAC application and sequences of operation. Actuators shall be designed for either clockwise or
counterclockwise fail-safe operation, have a manual positioning mechanism and control direction
of rotation switch. Run time shall be constant and independent of torque. A 2 to 10 VDC
feedback signal shall be provided for position feedback or master -slave applications.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15900 - 20
SECTION 15900 — DDC CONTROL SYSTEMS
B. Actuators shall be UL listed and CSA certified, protected from overload at all angles of rotation
and manufactured under ISO 9001 quality control standards.
C. All actuators on fresh air, return air and face and bypass dampers and valves shall be spring return
to their normally open or closed position in the event of power failure.
D. Damper Actuators: minimum 50% oversized for long life and increased reliability; to be mounted
outside the airstream.
E. All actuators shall be electric or electronic and designed to interface with the Direct Digital Control
System.
2.21 SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Furnished and installed by Division 16 Contractor. DDC Control System Contractor shall
supervise detector installation locations and wire into fan circuits; arranged to stop unit fan(s) upon
alarm activation.
PART 3 - CONTROL SEOUENCES OF OPERATION
3.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. System Specific Sequence of operation are shown in the construction documents
B. Systems include:
1. Air Handling Units
2. Hydronic heating systems
3. Exhaust Fans
4. Hydronic cooling systems
5. Start-up/Testing
6. Training
3.2 SYSTEM DESIGN & ARCHITECTURE
A. Furnish and install a temperature control and facilities automation system consisting of direct
digital control of primary mechanical equipment and terminal equipment, operator interface
equipment.
B. Provide a color graphic PC workstation to allow access to each Digital Control Unit and
Application Specific Controller and each controller's setpoints and analog/digital values; a portable
operator's terminal for local operator system interface and printer for documentation of alarms
messages.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15900 - 21
SECTION 15900 — DDC CONTROL SYSTEMS
C. Provide necessary hardware and software for the owner or his representative to communicate with
this building from a remote location via the Internet.
D. Install a communications network to link the Digital Control Units, Application Specific
Controllers, PC workstation, and other associated terminal controllers.
E. Graphic displays shall be layered from, and linked to the "default" menu screen with single point -
and -click function. Each graphic screen shall have a maximum of 16 dynamic system points
assigned for indication, adjustment or alarm functions. The following graphic screens shall be
provided as a minimum.
1. Main Menu of Graphic Screens
2. Overall Facility Floor Plan with Primary HVAC Equipment for EACH Building
3. One Graphic Screen for EACH AHU System in EACH Building
4. VAV Terminal Unit's Control and Monitoring Points for EACH Unit
5. Hot Water Heating System
6. Exhaust Fans and Ventilation Fans
7. Split System A/C Unit Monitoring Points
8. Miscellaneous Monitoring and Alarm Points
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field -
assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections.
Report results in writing.
B. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
1. Start, test, and adjust control systems.
2. Demonstrate compliance with requirements, including calibration and testing, and control
sequences.
3. Adjust, calibrate, and fine tune circuits and equipment to achieve sequence of operation
specified."
C. Verify DDC as follows:
1. Verify software including automatic restart, control sequences, scheduling, reset controls, and
occupied/unoccupied cycles.
2. Verify operation of operator workstation.
3. Verify local control units including self -diagnostics.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain control systems and components.
11. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15900 - 22
SECTION 15900 — DDC CONTROL SYSTEMS
12. Provide operator training on data display, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data,
executing commands, calibrating and adjusting devices, resetting default values, and
requesting logs. Include a minimum of 40 hours' dedicated instructor time on -site.
13. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."
14. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
15. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.
3.5 ON -SITE ASSISTANCE
A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide up to three
Project site visits, when requested by Owner, to adjust and calibrate components and to assist
Owner's personnel in making program changes and in adjusting sensors and controls to suit actual
conditions.
3.6 TRAINING
A. Provide a minimum of 40 hours of on -site or classroom training throughout the contract period for
personnel designated by the Owner. Each session shall be a minimum of four hours in length and
must be coordinated with the building Owner. Train the designated staff of Owners Representative
and Owner to enable them to:
1. Proficiently operate the system
2. Understand control system architecture and configuration
3. Understand DDC system components
4. Understand system operation, including DDC system control and optimizing routines
(algorithms)
5. Operate the workstation and peripherals
16. Log on and off the system
17. Access graphics, point reports, and logs
18. Adjust and change system set points, time schedules, and holiday schedules
19. Recognize malfunctions of the system by observation of the printed copy and graphical
visual signals
20. Understand system drawings, and Operation and Maintenance manual
21. Understand the job layout and location of control components
22. Access data from DDC controllers
13.Operate portable operators terminals
***END OF SECTION***
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
CITY �rl
SECTION 15990 - TESTING. ADJUSTING. AND BALANCING
PART l - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design objec-
tives, including the following:
1. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including sub -mains,
branches, return ductwork, outside air, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to
specified tolerances.
2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities.
3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment.
4. Setting quantitative performance of new HVAC equipment.
5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Measuring sound and vibration through new coil and housing.
7. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and equipment are in-
cluded in the Sections that specify those systems and equipment.
2. Field quality -control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system and equipment
installation is specified in system and equipment Sections.
r•
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce ..
fan speed or adjust a damper.
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including sub -mains, branches, and
terminals, according to design quantities.
C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high
air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn —»
from a persods skin than is normally dissipated.
D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable
results.
E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a
closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
G. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.
H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause
reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
i
t WILL ROGERS C+LISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15990 - 1 _,
SECTION 15990 - TESTING. ADJUSTING. AND BALANCING
I. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a
fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was perform-
ance tested.
J. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the
distribution system.
K. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.
L. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and reporting
the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
M. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
N. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.
O. CTI: Cooling Tower Institute.
Q. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality -Assurance Submittals: Within 30 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit
2 copies of evidence that the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent and this Projects testing,
adjusting, and balancing team members meet the qualifications specified in the "Quality Assur-
ance" Article below.
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Contractor's Notice to Pro-
ceed, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3 of this
Section.
C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, sub-
mit 2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by-step procedures as
specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below. Include a complete set of report forms intended
for use on this Project.
D. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared, as
specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing
Agent.
E. Sample Report Forms: Submit 2 sets of sample testing, adjusting, and balancing report forms.
F. Warranty: Submit 2 copies of special warranty specified in the "Warranty" Article below.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by AABC.
A. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from SMACNA's "I-IVAC Sys-
tems --Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS��9CY== 4ut�
SECTION 15990 - TESTING. ADJUSTING. AND BALANCING
C. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more frequently if
required by the instrument manufacturer.
1.5 REFERENCES
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-
tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. -
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner may occupy completed areas of the building before
Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and balancing op-
erations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory -authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,
HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to
support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.
B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.
C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water dis-
tribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The national project performance guarantee specified in this Article shall
not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Con-
tract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by
the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of sys-
tems and equipment.
B. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract.
C. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow -control
devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Con -
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15990 - 3
SECTION 15990 - TESTING. ADJUSTING. AND BALANCING
tract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible
and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.
D. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
E. Examine project record documents described in Division 1.
F. Examine Engineer's design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design
assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies
and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. Special attention shall be given
to the smoke purge system serving the holding cells in the basement of the building. The test-
ing, adjusting and balancing contractor is required to be present during the smoke purge tests
and shall make adjustment to the fans and diffusers/grilles to bring the system into compliance.
G. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate performance
data to project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired
or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate sys-
tem effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under
conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the
factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201,
"Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems —Duct Design,"
Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
H. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have
been performed.
I. Examine system and equipment test reports.
J. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balanc-
ing.
K. Examine air -handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for opera-
tion.
L. Examine terminal units, such as variable -air -volume boxes and mixing boxes, to verify that
they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
M. Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for return air, to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe
penetrations and other holes are sealed.
N. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
O. Examine 2-way and 3-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting
or mixing fluid flows.
P. Examine heat -transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
Q. Examine piping system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15990 - 4
SECTION 15990 - TESTING. ADJUSTING. AND BALANCING
R. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.
S. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully
closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in variable air volume units and
mixing boxes/ductwork.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including 2-way valves and 3-way mixing and
diverting valves, are properly connected.
5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and
cold walls.
6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. -
7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
8. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system reactions to
changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values.
9. Interlocked systems are operating.
10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.
It. The testing, adjusting and balancing contractor shall thoroughly review the construction
document control diagrams and the submitted data for the building DDC system. A "
complete understanding of each system's operation is required to ensure that the system
is properly balanced. The testing, adjusting and balancing contractor shall work with the
controls contractor to ensure that the systems perform correctly. There are system, pri-
marily the chilled water pumping system, that will take a substantial coordination and
balancing effort to set the system as indicated. The contractor shall ensure that there is
sufficient time allocated in the project.
T. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and balanc-
ing procedures.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step proce-
dures. The hydronic system includes a variable secondary flow chilled water system. Provide a
specific testing, adjusting, and balancing plan for this system that includes strategies and step-
by-step procedures for review.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:
I. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
2.Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3.Automatic temperature -control systems are operational.
4.Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5.Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6.Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7.Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air -pattern adjustments are required and access to
balancing devices is provided.
8. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be met.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15990 - 5
SECTION 15990 - TESTING. ADJUSTING. AND BALANCING
3.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures con-
tained in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems --Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the mini-
sa
mum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balanc-
ing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Re-
store vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this Project.
C. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, includ-
ing damper -control positions, valve indicators, fan -speed -control levers, and similar controls
and devices, to show final settings.
3.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Prepare test reports for fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended
testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan
volumes.
B. For variable -air -volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.
D. Check the airflow patterns from the outside -air louvers and dampers and the return- and ex-
haust -air dampers, through the supply -fan discharge and mixing dampers.
E. Locate start -stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
H. Check for airflow blockages.
I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
J. Check for proper sealing of air -handling unit components.
3.5 CONSTANT -VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant -volume supply-, return-, and outside -air sys-
tems. Additional procedures are required for variable -air -volume supply -air systems and proc-
ess exhaust -air systems. These additional procedures are specified in other articles in this Sec-
tion.
B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the fan
manufacturer.
C. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15990 - 6
SECTION 15990 - TESTING. ADJUSTING. AND BALANCING
1. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and up-
stream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
2. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
3. Measure inlet static pressure of single -inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possi-
ble, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions.
D. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures
versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system ef-
fect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design
and actual condition.
E. Do not make fan -speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufac-
turers about fan -speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan -motor amperage to
ensure no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling and full heating modes to de-
termine the maximum required brake horsepower.
F. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, sub -main ducts, and major branch ducts to design air-
flows within specified tolerances.
G. Re -measure each sub -main and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust
sub -mains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.
H. Measure terminal outlets using a direct -reading hood or the outlet manufacturer's written in-
structions and calculating factors.
I. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified tolerances
of design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the
dampers at the air terminals.
Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of design quantities
without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.
3.6 FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end
of system. Check the sum of branch -circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct
variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as -built" piping layouts.
C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to
the general preparation procedures specified above:
l.Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
2.Check expansion tank liquid level.
3.Check makeup -water -station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
4.Check flow -control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at design flow.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15990 - 7
Li
SECTION 15990 - TESTING. ADJUSTING. AND BALANCING
5.Set differential -pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at
fully closed position when pump is positive -displacement type, unless several terminal valves
are kept open.
6.Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
7.Check pump -motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow -balancing device so mo-
tor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
8.Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
3.7 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Determine water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive -
displacement pumps-
1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Verify with
the pump manufacturer that this will not damage pump. Read pressure differential across
the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the
point on the manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and confirm that the pump has the
intended impeller size.
2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the
pump and mark the pump manufacturer's head -capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge
valve until design water flow is achieved.
3. Verify pump -motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the
system based on the pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake
horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual
amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
4.Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.
B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated settings. Ensure that motor actuated
valves have the correct actuator (i.e. fast acting vs. slow acting).
C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
D. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow -pressure -drop relation-
ship may be used as a flow -indicating device.
E. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5
percent greater than design flow.
F. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of design flow rate as follows:
I - Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over design flow.
2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over
design flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over design flow.
3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.
G. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump
heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures, including outdoor -air temperature.
H. Measure the differential -pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15990 - 8
SECTION 15990 - TESTING. ADJUSTING. AND BALANCING
I. For Variable Primary Flow Hydronic Systems:
a. Begin branch balancing by closing all branch valves except the one on the critical branch
(highest pressure drop). This branch valve to be wide open.
b. Adjust the differential pressure controller so that the variable speed pump delivers design
flow through this branch.
c. Close the coil valve on this branch and run the pump at full speed to be sure there is no
flow in the branch and that the actuator closes tightly against full pump head.
d. Repeat the procedure on all other branches to ensure that the pressure drop on the remain-
ing branches is less than the assumed critical branch and that all valves close tightly.
e. If another branch is found to have a higher pressure drop than the assumed critical branch
then reset the differential pressure controller upwards to satisfy this branch.
f. The differential pressure sensor and calibrated flow station shown on plans can be used to
determine branch pressures and flows via the DDC system.
3.8 MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
L Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
2.Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating if high -efficiency motor.
5.Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6.Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal -protection -element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable -Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper opera-
tion. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and
nameplate data.
3.9 HEAT -TRANSFER COILS
A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1.Entering- and leaving -water temperatures.
2. Water flow rate.
3. W ater pressure drop.
4.Dry-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air.
5. Wet -bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.
6.Air pressure drop.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15990 - 9
SECTION 15990 - TESTING. ADJUSTING. AND BALANCING
3.10 TEMPERATURE TESTING
oft A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature regulation
within the automatic temperature -control system.
0
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2 successive 8-
hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings.
Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
C. Measure outside -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
3.11 TEMPERATURE -CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect con-
trol functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.
D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low -temperature controllers).
E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.
F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and
correlate with airflow and water -flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input
changes.
G. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
H. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
I. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.12 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction -Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as speci-
fied in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'
balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facili-
tate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to
HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and
balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, proce-
dures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found
in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each build-
ing floor for systems serving multiple floors.
0 3.13 FINAL REPORT
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15990 - 10
SECTION 15990 - TESTING. ADJUSTING. AND BALANCING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter -quality font, on standard bond paper, in 3-
ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and bal-
ancing engineer.
Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following:
I. Pump curves.
2.Fan curves.
3.Manufacturers' test data
4.Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5.Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved Shop
Drawings and Product Data.
General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in the
final report, as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Engineer's name and address.
6. Contractor's name and address.
7. Report date.
8. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.
9. Summary of contents, including the following:
10. Design versus final performance.
11. Notable characteristics of systems.
12. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.
13. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
14. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
15. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design values.
16. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust -air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
e. Settings for supply -air, static -pressure controller.
f. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
Air -Handling Unit Test Reports: For air -handling units with coils, include the following:
I. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15990 - 11
L1
SECTION 15990 - TESTING. ADJUSTING. AND BALANCING
d.
Model number and unit size.
e.
Manufacturer's serial number.
f.
Unit arrangement and class.
g.
Discharge arrangement.
h.
Sheave make, size in inches and bore.
i.
Sheave dimensions, center -to -center and amount of adjustments in inches).
j.
Number of belts, make, and size.
k.
Number of filters, type, and size.
2.Motor Data: Include the following:
a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full -load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center -to -center and amount of adjustments in inches
3.Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a.
Total airflow rate in cfm
w, b.
Total system static pressure in inches wg
c.
Fan rpm.
d.
Discharge static pressure in inches wg
e.
Filter static -pressure differential in inches wg
f.
Preheat coil static -pressure differential in inches wg
g.
Cooling coil static -pressure differential in inches wg
h.
Heating coil static -pressure differential in inches wg
i.
Outside airflow in cfm
j.
Return airflow in cfm
k.
Outside -air damper position.
1.
Return -air damper position.
m.
Relief -air damper position.
In
No
G. Apparatus -Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following:
1.Coil Data: Include the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in fins per inch Make and model number.
f. Face area in sq. ft. Tube size in NPS Tube and fin materials.
g. Circuiting arrangement.
2.Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Airflow rate in cfm
b. Average face velocity in fpm.
c. Air pressure drop in inches wg
UR WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15990 - 12
SECTION 15990 - TESTING. ADJUSTING. AND BALANCING
d. Outside -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
e. Return -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
f. Entering -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
g. Leaving -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
h. Water flow rate in gpm.
i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.
j. Entering -water temperature in deg F.
k. Leaving -water temperature in deg F.
1. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
in. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F
3-Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in
central -station air -handling units, include the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil identification.
d. Capacity in Btuh Number of stages.
e. Connected volts, phase, and hertz.
f. Rated amperage.
g. Airflow rate in cfm Face area in sq. ft. Minimum face velocity in fpm
4.Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Heat output in Btuh
b. Airflow rate in cfm Air velocity in fpm Entering -air temperature in deg F Leaving -air
temperature in deg F Voltage at each connection.
c. Amperage for each phase.
H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
I. Fan Data: Include the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches and bore.
h. Sheave dimensions, center -to -center and amount of adjustments in inches
2. Motor Data: Include the following:
a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full -load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches and bore Number of belts, make, and size.
3.Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15990 - 13
Em
SECTION 15990 - TESTING. ADJUSTING. AND BALANCING
a. Total airflow rate in cfm
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg Fan rpm.
c. Discharge static pressure in inches wg Suction static pressure in inches wg
J. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems, include the follow -
No
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Unit make and model number.
d. Manufacturer's compressor serial numbers.
e. Compressor make.
f. Compressor model and serial numbers.
g. Refrigerant weight in lbs
h. Low ambient temperature cutoff in deg F
2.Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a.
Inlet -duct static pressure in inches wg
b.
Entering -air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F
c.
Leaving -air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F
d.
Control settings.
e.
Suction temperature in deg F
f.
Condenser refrigerant pressure in psig
g.
Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg F
h.
Number of fans.
i.
Condenser fan airflow rate in cfin
j.
Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower.
K. Pump Test Reports: For pumps, include the following data.
1.Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Make and size.
e. Model and serial numbers.
f. Water flow rate in gpm
g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig
h. Pump rpm.
i. Impeller diameter in inches
j. Motor make and frame size.
k. Motor horsepower and rpm.
1. Voltage at each connection.
m. Amperage for each phase.
n. Full -load amperage and service factor.
o. Seal type.
8 WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15990 - 14
SECTION 15990 - TESTING. ADJUSTING. AND BALANCING
2.Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Static head in feet of head or psig
b Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig
c. Full -open flow rate in gpm
d. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig
e. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig
f. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig
L. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following:
l.Report Data: Include the following:
a. Instrument type and make.
b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
3.14 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing and
balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct un-
usual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed ,.
during near -peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and ad-
justing during near -peak summer and winter conditions.
***END OF SECTION***
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 15990 - 15
Nil
SECTION 16050 — BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PARTI-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
no
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-
tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Raceways.
2. Building wire and connectors.
3. Supporting devices for electrical components.
4. Electrical identification.
5. Electrical demolition.
6. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
7. Touchup painting.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
E. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For Conduit and Wiring.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for in-
tended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1 1.6 COORDINATION
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 16050 - 1
SECTION 16050 — BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and ar-
range in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations
that follow.
I. Set inserts and sleeves in poured -in -place concrete, masonry work, and other structural
components as they are constructed.
B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient
flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in
the building.
C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by fin-
ished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors."
D. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field -finished surfaces, coordinate installa-
tion of identification devices with completion of finished surface.
E. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by acoustical ceilings
and similar finishes, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAYS
A- EMT: ANSI C80.3, zinc -coated steel, with set -screw or compression fittings.
B. FMC: Zinc -coated steel.
C. IMC: ANSI C80.6, zinc -coated steel, with threaded fittings.
D. LFMC: Zinc -coated steel with sunlight -resistant and mineral -oil -resistant plastic jacket.
E. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 PVC, with NEMA TC3 fittings. .
F. Raceway Fittings: Specifically designed for the raceway type with which used.
2.2 CONDUCTORS
A. Conductors, No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid or stranded copper.
B. Conductors, Larger Than No. 10 AWG: Stranded copper.
C. Insulation: Thermoplastic, rated at 75 deg C minimum.
D. Wire Connectors and Splices: Units of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class suitable
for service indicated.
2.3 SUPPORTING DEVICES
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 16050 - 2
SECTION 16050 — BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
A. Material: Cold -formed steel, with corrosion -resistant coating acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot -dip galvanized steel.
C. Slotted -Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch- diameter slot-
ted holes at a maximum of 2 inches o.c., in webs.
D. Slotted -Steel Channel Supports: Comply with Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for slot-
ted channel framing.
1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.
2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports.
E. Nonmetallic Channel and Angle Systems: Structural -grade, factory -formed, glass -fiber -resin
channels and angles with 9/16-inch- diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least
one surface.
1. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channels and angles.
2. Fittings and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may
be stainless steel.
F. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-
1b clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring -steel clamps or click -
type hangers.
G. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
H. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory -fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body
and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have
number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body con-
structed of malleable -iron casting with hot -dip galvanized finish.
I. Expansion Anchors: Carbon -steel wedge or sleeve type.
J. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type.
a K. Powder -Driven Threaded Studs: Heat -treated steel.
2.4 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application category.
Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, and these Specifications.
r
B. Raceway and Cable Labels: Comply with ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for
legend and minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.
1. Type: Pretensioned, wraparound plastic sleeves. Flexible, preprinted, color -coded,
acrylic band sized to suit the diameter of the item it identifies.
2. Type: Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive, vinyl. Legend is overlaminated with a clear,
e weather- and chemical -resistant coating.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 16050 - 3
SECTION 16050 — BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
3. Color: Black letters on orange background.
4. Legend: Indicates voltage.
C. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape,
not less than 1 inch wide by 3 mils thick.
D. Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted
numbers and letters.
E. Color -Coding Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme.
F. Engraved -Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic
laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1/16-inch minimum thickness for signs up
to 20 sq. in. and 1/8-inch minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters
on white background.
G. Interior Warning and Caution Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. Pre-
printed, aluminum, baked -enamel -finish signs, punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners, with
colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application.
H. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self -tapping, stainless -steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless-
steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
2.5 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Forms and Reinforcement Materials: As specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -
Place Concrete."
B. Concrete: 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -
Place Concrete."
2.6 TOUCHUP PAINT
A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc -rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, ar-
range and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.
B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other build-
ing systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 16050 - 4
0
SECTION 16050 — BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.
Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.
D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Use
the following raceways for outdoor installations:
1.
Exposed: IMC.
2.
Concealed: IMC.
3.
Underground, Single Run: RNC.
4.
Underground, Grouped: RNC.
5.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC.
6.
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4.
B. Use
the following raceways for indoor installations:
1.
Exposed: EMT.
2.
Concealed: EMT.
3.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment: FMC; except in wet or damp locations, use LFMC.
4.
Damp or Wet Locations: IMC.
5.
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
r
3.3 RACEWAY AND CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Conceal raceways and cables, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and
floors.
B. Install raceways and cables at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-
water pipes. Locate horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Use temporary raceway caps to prevent foreign matter from entering.
D. Make conduit bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and
e straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Use raceway and cable fittings compatible with raceways and cables and suitable for use and
location.
F. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc -coated steel or monofilament plas-
tic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end
of the pull wire.
G. Install telephone and signal system raceways, 2-inch trade size and smaller, in maximum
e lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate
lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements, in addi-
tion to requirements above.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 16050 - 5
0
SECTION 16050 — BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
H. Connect motors and equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement with a
maximum of 72-inch flexible conduit. Install LFMC in wet or damp locations. Install separate
ground conductor across flexible connections.
3.4 WIRING METHODS FOR POWER, LIGHTING, AND CONTROL CIRCUITS
A. Feeders: Type THHN/THWN insulated conductors in raceway.
B. Underground Feeders and Branch Circuits: Type THWN or single -wire, Type OF insulated
conductors in raceway.
C. Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN insulated conductors in raceway.
D. Remote -Control Signaling and Power -Limited Circuits: Type THHN/THWN insulated conduc-
tors in raceway for Classes 1, 2, and 3, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent
or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than un-spliced conductors.
B. Install wiring at outlets with at least 12 inches of slack conductor at each outlet. _
C. Connect outlet and component connections to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical
connectors and terminals, according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If
manufacture's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.
3.6 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot -dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system
components.
B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.
C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click -type clamp system.
D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at
least four; minimum of 200-lb design load.
3.7 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.
B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide
U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for se-
curing hanger rods and conduits.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 16050 - 6
SECTION 16050 — BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket -type hangers.
„t D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent
minimum in the future.
E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable -iron pipe hangers or clamps.
F. Install 1/4-inch- diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Spring -steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be
used instead of malleable -iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and
receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted chan-
nel and angle supports.
H. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried
entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.
I. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.
J. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Sup-
port sheet -metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are
used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an ap-
proved fastener not more than 24 inches from the box.
K. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control en-
closures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are
mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.
L. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core -drilled
holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire -rated
gypsum walls and of all other fire -rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erec-
tion of concrete and masonry walls.
M. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise in-
dicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are indi-
cated:
1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw -type nails.
2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry
units.
3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.
4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.
5. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with
lock washers may be used in existing concrete.
6. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring -tension clamps on steel.
a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
7. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe
straps, or other items.
8. Light Steel: Sheet -metal screws.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 16050 - 7
SECTION 16050 — BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
9. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its
proof -test load.
3.8 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES
A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and mainte-
nance of equipment.
B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification
with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and
standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
C. Self -Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying. -'
D. Identify raceways and cables with color banding as follows:
1. Bands: Pretensioned, snap -around, colored plastic sleeves or colored adhesive marking
tape. Make each color band 2 inches wide, completely encircling conduit, and place ad-
jacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side.
2. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot
maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.
E. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and circuit num-
bers in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color -coding may be used for volt-
age and phase identification.
F. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior under- "
ground power, control, signal, and communication lines located directly above power and
communication lines. Locate 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. If width of multiple lines in-
stalled in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches, overall, use a single
line marker.
G. Color -code 208/120-V system secondary service, feeder, and branch -circuit conductors
throughout the secondary electrical system as follows:
1. Phase A: Black.
2. Phase B: Red.
3. Phase C: Blue.
4. Neutral: White.
5. Ground: Green. _
H. Color -code 480/277-V system secondary service, feeder, and branch -circuit conductors
throughout the secondary electrical system as follows:
1. Phase A: Yellow.
2. Phase B: Brown.
3. Phase C: Purple.
4. Neutral: White with a colored stripe or gray.
S. Ground: Green.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM ._ HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 16050 - 8
SECTION 16050 — BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
I. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required to comply with 29 CFR, Chap-
ter XVII, Part 1910.145, and where needed to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electri-
cal systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic -laminated instruction
signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
Install metal -backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.
J. Install engraved -laminated emergency -operating signs with white letters on red background
with minimum 3/8-inch- high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shed-
ding, and other emergency operations.
3.9 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to
achieve fire -resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installation require-
ments are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."
3.10 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases not less than 4 inches larger, in both directions, than supported unit.
Follow supported equipment manufacturer's anchorage recommendations and setting templates
for anchor -bolt and tie locations, unless otherwise indicated. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compres-
sive -strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Con-
crete."
3.11 DEMOLITION
A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or dis-
turbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal
capacity, quality, and functionality.
B. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be de-
molished, in their entirety.
C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in
place, 2 inches below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to
match existing finish.
D. Remove demolished material from Project site.
E. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for relo-
cation.
3.12 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to
permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 16050 - 9
SECTION 16050 — BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed
surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and
refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:
1. Raceways.
2. Building wire and connectors.
3. Supporting devices for electrical components.
4. Electrical identification.
5. Concrete bases.
6. Electrical demolition.
7. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
8. Touchup painting.
3.14 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Divi-
sion 9 Section "Painting."
1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to
suit the degree of damage at each location.
2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing
and application of successive coats.
3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufac-
turer.
4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
3.15 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.
B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes,
and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. -
***END OF SECTION***
WILL ROGERS COLLISEUM — HVAC SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 16050 - 10